IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 < 
 
 f^ 
 
 t/j 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 
 M 11112,5 
 
 1.4 
 
 6" 
 
 iilM 
 
 2.0 
 
 1.6 
 
 v: 
 
 ^ 
 
 /}. 
 
 ^ 
 
 '3 
 
 
 ^ > 
 
 ^v 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 /A 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEGT MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4S03 
 
 V 
 
 Si.. 
 
 4^ 
 
 
CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de mfrroreproductions historiques 
 
 lyij I 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliogtaphically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exitmplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la m^thode normale de filmage 
 sont indiqu6s ci-dessous. 
 
 □ Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de coule > 
 
 □ Covers damaged/ 
 Couverture endommagee 
 
 □ Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaurde et/ou pellicul6e 
 
 □ Cover title missing/ 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 I I Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes g^ographiques en couleur 
 
 □ Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 □ Coloured plates and/o illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 □ Bou 
 Reli 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 
 I I Coloured pages/ 
 
 n 
 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommagdes 
 
 I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 
 e avec d'autres documents 
 
 Pages restaur^es et/ou pellicul^es 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxei 
 Pages d^colordes, tachetdes ou piqu^es 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages d^tach^es 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of prir 
 
 Quality in^gale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary materic 
 Comprend du materiel supplementaire 
 
 r~^ Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 
 I I Pages detached/ 
 
 I y\ Showthrough/ 
 
 I I Quality of print varies/ 
 
 ] I Includes supplementary material/ 
 
 □ 
 
 D 
 
 □ 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 La reliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge intdrieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout^es 
 lors J'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, torsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas 6t6 filmdes. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppl6mentaires; 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuilli9t d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont M filmdes d nouveau de facon i 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est filmd au taux de reduction indiqud ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 14X 18X 22X 
 
 26X 
 
 SOX 
 
 / 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 ■■ ^NiPW^^'v 
 
 32X 
 
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 National Library of Canada 
 
 L'exemplaire filmd fut reproduit grdce d la 
 g6n6rosit6 de: 
 
 Bibliothdque nationale du Canada 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies ir printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustt > ' impression. 
 
 The last recorded fr^me on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol — •- (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 6X6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettet6 de l'exemplaire filmd, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimde sont film6s en commenpant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont filmds en commenpant par la 
 premiere page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de cha(;ue microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbole —^' signifie "A SUIVRE", le 
 symbole V signifie "FIM". 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 filmds 6 des taux de reduction diff^rents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour §tre 
 reproduit en un seul clich§, il est filmd d partir 
 de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche 6 droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mdthode. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
^1 Mil inji ii|i iiniiMiaiBi 
 
FIRST BOOK 
 
 ON 
 
 ANATOMY, 
 PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 FOR 
 
 GRAMMAR SCHOOLS AND FAMILIES 
 
 WITH EIGHTY-THREE ENGRAVINGS. 
 
 By CALVIN CUTTER, M.D. 
 
 AUTHOR OF "ANATOMT, PUTSIOLOOT, AND UYQIENK, FOR C0LLE0E8, A0AI)KMIK8, AN© 
 
 PAMIUE8;" "SECOND BOOK ON ANATuMf, PlirSIOLOOY, AND UfUIENB, 
 
 FOR ACADEMIES, BOHOOLS, AND FAMIUE8;" " ANATOJllOAl, 
 
 OHTUXB PLATES FOB OCliOOIS, KTa 
 
 BEV18BD STEREOTYPE EDITION. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA: 
 
 J. B. LIPPINCOTT & CO. 
 
 TORONTO: 
 
 ADAM MILLER, 
 
 11 Wellington Street, West. 
 
 1871. 
 

 Bntcrod according to Act of CongreM, in the year 1864. by 
 
 CALVIN CUTTER, M.D.. 
 
 Iq the CloTR'i OflBce of the District Court of the DlBtrtct of taaiwachnHOtto. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 Iw presenting this work to the public, th« author 
 would indulge in a few prefatory suggestion*. 
 
 Education, to be complete, mii?t be not only moral 
 and intellectual, but physical. As the culture of the 
 mind and of the affections is the subject of systematic 
 attention in early life, should not the education of the 
 physical powers be commenced as early ? It will 
 demand no more maturity and thought to understand 
 the reasons for adequate clothing, bathing, *he neces- 
 sity of an erect position in standing and suting, regu- 
 larity in taking food, the supply of pure air to the 
 lungs, (fcc, than to comprehend geographical details 
 or moral truths. Is not a knowledge of the laws upon 
 which health depends, as important to the develop- 
 ment of a vigorous physical constitution, w moral 
 instniction is to the formation of correct moral prin- 
 ciples ? Can any reason be given why both should 
 ♦lot be taught in the school-room? 
 
 A child should be taught to call each organ by its 
 correct name. No more effort is required to learn the 
 meaning of a proper^ than an improper term. F^or 
 example : a child will pronounce the word as readily, 
 and obtain as correct an idea, if you say lungs^ as 
 if you used the word lights. 
 
 In preparing tnis work, it has not been deemed 
 necessary to use low, vulgar terms, for the purpose of 
 being understood ^ but such words have been selected 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 as good usage sanctions. Should the pupil meet witn 
 any word he does not understand, let him consult his 
 dictionary, as he should do in perusing works upon 
 history, when a similar difficulty occurs. 
 
 To iFkSure a correct pronunciation of the technical 
 words interspersed with the text, they have been 
 divided into syllables, and the accented syllables des- 
 ignated. An jjrnple Glossary of technical terms luis 
 aiso been appended to the work, to which reference 
 should be made. 
 
 To the teacher we would suggest the propriety of 
 calling on a pupil of the class, to describe the anatomy 
 of an organ from an anatomical outline plate ; after- 
 wards call upon another to give the physiology of 
 the part, while a third may state the hygiene ; aftei 
 which, the questions at the bottom of the page may 
 be asked promiscuously, and thus the detailed knowl- 
 edge which each pupil porsessea of the subject will 
 be tested. 
 
 With advanced pupils, it is recommended that the 
 subject be examined in the form of topics. The ques- 
 tions in Italics are designed for this method of reci- 
 tation. 
 
 For a more full and complete explanation of Anato- 
 my, Physiology, and Hygiene, the pupil is referred to 
 the Author's treatise, of 450 pages, for Colleges, Acade- 
 mies, and Families, or to his second boot:, of 300 
 pages, for Academies, Schools, and Families. 
 
 To the instructors of youth, and the patrons of 
 Mucaticn, this work is respectfully j^ubmitted. 
 
 Warp.en, J/a««., 1852 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 1 GENr.RAL IlEHARKS, 9 
 
 S. Anatomt of tub Bones, 11 
 
 3. Anatomt of the Bonks, continued, . . .... 16 
 
 4. Phtbioloot of thb Bonbs, 21 
 
 5. Htoienb of the Bones, 24 
 
 6. Anatomy of the Muscles, 27 
 
 7. Phtbioloot of the Moscles, . . SO 
 
 8. Htoiene of the Muscles, 86 
 
 9. Anatomt of the Teeth, 43 
 
 »0. Anatomt of the Digestive Okoans , 47 
 
 11. Phtsioloot of the Diqestivb Okoans, 63 
 
 12. Hygiene of the Digestive Organs, 56 
 
 13- Anatomt of the Circclatokt Organs, 62 
 
 14. Phtsioloot of th« Circulatort Organs, 67 
 
 15. Htgienb of the Circolatort Organs, 70 
 
 16. Absorption, 76 
 
 17. Secretion, 82 
 
 18. Nutrition, 86 
 
 19. Anatomt of the Rkspiratort Organs, .... .89 
 
 20. Phyj»iologt of the Re: iratort Organs, ... .93 
 81 Hygiene of thb Kkbpiratory Organs,. . > .98 
 
tftrw^^jr^^v^ WT'w^ 
 
 TUl 0ONTINT8. 
 
 Chapter PS|, 
 
 22. Animal Hbat, 10« 
 
 23. Anatomt o» thb Vocal Oroaks, 110 
 
 24. Anatomt of the Ssin, 115 
 
 25. PUTSIOLOOT OF THB SkIN, , 119 
 
 26. Utoibnb of tub Skist, 122 
 
 27. Anatomt of the NKRvor5 Ststbm, 127 
 
 28. Fhtsioloot of thb Nervous Stbtkx, 131 
 
 29. Htoienb of thb Nebvous Ststbm, 134 
 
 80. Senhb of Touch, 138 
 
 Sbnbb of Tastb, 139 
 
 Sense of Smell, 141 
 
 81. Anatomt of thb Organs of Visiok, 143 
 
 32. Phtsioloot of the Organs of Vision, 149 
 
 S3. Anatov; of the Organs of Hearing, 152 
 
 34. Phtsiologt of the Organs of Ebabibo, 155 
 
 35. Mbanh of preserving the Ubalth, 158 
 
 86 DiRIlOTIONS fob NubSBS, 164 
 
 APPE>'DIX, 170 
 
 GLOSSABr, 176 
 
 INDEl . 181 
 
FIUST BOOK 
 
 ox 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND 
 HYGIENE. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 GENERAL REMARKS. 
 
 1. Anatomy is a description of the organs^ or parts o/ a 
 Dody. 
 
 Examples. Ist. Flowers have roots, stems, and blossoms. 
 These are their organs. 2d. The teeth, stomach, and heart, 
 are some of the organs of the human body.* 
 
 2. Physiology is a description of X\\q function^ or use of an 
 organ. 
 
 Examples. 1st. The roots of flowers suck up water, to 
 make them grow. This is their function. 2d. The stomach, 
 in man, is one of the organs that prepare the food for his 
 growth. This is its function. 
 
 3. Anatomy and Physiology are divided into two kinds, 
 namely, Animal au \ Vegetable. 
 
 , • Where examples are given, let the pupil mention other analog 
 gous ones. 
 
 I. What is anatomy ? Give examples. 2. What is physiology ? Givo 
 examples. 3. How many kinds of anatomy and physiology are there? 
 
10 OENhRAL REMARKS. 
 
 4. Anitnal Anatomy and Physiology are again divided into 
 Human nnd Comparative. 
 
 5. Ilunuin Anatomy and Physiology describe iho structure 
 and functions of the organs of man, 
 
 6. Comparative Anatomy and Physiology describe the struc- 
 ture and functions of the organs of other animals than man. 
 
 Examples. As the horse, the monkey, and the whalo. 
 
 7. Vegetable Anatomy and Physiology describe the struc- 
 ture and functions of different parts of trees, shrubs, plants, and 
 flowers. 
 
 8. ilvGiENE is the art of preserving health, or that depart- 
 ment of medicine which treats of the preservation oiT health. 
 
 9. All bodies in nature are divided into Organic and In- 
 organic. Organic bodias include animals and plants. Inor- 
 ganic bodies include earths, metals, and other minerals. 
 
 10. All organized bodies have a limited period of life, and 
 this period varies with every species. The duration of some 
 plants is limited to a single summer, as many garden ilowers ; 
 while some trees, as the olive, live many hundred years. Some 
 atiimals live but a short time, while the elephant lives more 
 thun a century. 
 
 l.\ The life of man is shortened by disease ; but disease is 
 undc the control of fixed laws — laws which we are capable 
 of understanding and obeying. How important, then, is the 
 study of ; thysiology and hygiene ! For how can we expect to 
 obey laws which we do not ui. 'erstand ? 
 
 4. How are animal anatomy and physiology divided ? 6. What do 
 human anatomy and physiology describe ? 6. What do comparative anat- 
 omy and physiology describe ? 7. What do vegetable anatomy and physi- 
 ology describe ? 8. What is hygiene ? 9. How are all bodies in nature 
 divided ? What bodies are called organic ? What bodies are called in- 
 organic ? 10. Have all animals and plants a limited period of life ? Doei 
 this period vary with different speiies of animals and plants? Give some 
 exr.mples. 1 1. How is life usually shortened ? Wliy is the study of phyai< 
 •lugy aiid ii) gicne important to every person ? 
 
ANATOMY OF THE BONES. 11 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 THE BONES. 
 
 12. The b)ne3 are firm and hard, and of a dull white color 
 In all the higher ordors of animals, among which is man, they 
 are in the interic r of the body, while in lobsters, crabs, <fcc., 
 thoy are on the outside, forming a case, which protects 'he 
 movable parts from injury. 
 
 ANATOMY OF 1'HE BONES. 
 
 13. There are two hundred and eight • bones in the human 
 body, beside ifio teeth. 
 
 14. These, for convenience, are divided into four parts: 
 1st. The bones of the Head. 2d. The bones of the Trunk. 
 3d. Tne bones of the U2)per Extremities. 4lh. Tho bones of 
 the Lower Extremities. 
 
 15. The bones of the iikad are divided into those of the 
 Skull.^ Eary and Face. '^ 
 
 16. The SKULL is formed of eight bones. These are joined 
 together by ragged edges, called sutures. (Fig. 2.) 
 
 Observation. The sutures stop, in a measure, the jars 
 caused by external blows. Children should never strike each 
 
 ♦ Some anatomists reckon more than this number, others leas, for 
 the reason that, at different periods of life, the niunber of pieces of 
 which one bone is formed, varies. Example. The breast-bone, in 
 infancy, has ei(/ht pieces ; in youth, three ; in old age, but one. 
 
 ^1 '" '■ ' llll.l— ■! ■■ I. IMIII. — ■ 111 ■ I II ■ I'l — ^— ■ I 1 
 
 12. Describe the bones. 13. How many bones in the human body? 
 14. How are they diy'ded? Name them. 15 — 18. Give the anatomy of tht 
 bones of the head. 15. How are the bones of the head divided ? 16. Ho* 
 nuiny bones in the skull ? How are the bones of the skull joined togethn *^ 
 
^■vm^fM>.fn^e^<^^^*v'''';m!pmfm!^figffifmir 
 
 12 ANATOMT, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 Other upon the head, I nuse the bones of the skull in them 
 are softer than in adults. 
 # 17. In each ear are four small bones. They aid in hearing. 
 
 18. In the face are fourteen bones. They support the 
 softer parts outside of them. 
 
 19. The TRUNK has fifty-four bones — iwenty-four RihSf 
 tw'enty-foui" bones in the Spinal Col'umn^ (back-bone;) four 
 in the Pelvis; the Ster'n^.tPy (breast-bone;) and one at the 
 root of the tongue. 
 
 20. All the RIBS are joined to the spinal column. There 
 are twelve on each side. 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 ^^. 
 
 Ptg. S. The bones of the npper part of the skuU. 1 , 1, 9, 9, 3, The mturw that joia 
 Oie bones. 
 
 21. The seven upper ribs are united in front to the sternum 
 by a yielding substance called car^ti-lage^* (gristle.) The 
 
 • See paragraj/h 46. 
 
 17. What is the use of futures ? How many bonea in each ear ? "What 
 Is their use? J", iiow many bones in the face? 19 — 29. Give the anato 
 my of the hones of the tntnk. 19. How many bones in the trunk ? Name 
 them. 20. To what are all the ribs joined ? How many on each side ? 
 What does fig. 2 represent? 21. How are the first seTen ribs united io 
 tront? 
 
ANATOMY OF TFK BOWES. 18 
 
 remjining five are not attached, directly, to the sternum. 
 Three are joined to each other by cartilage ; two are not con , 
 fined; hence they are called "floating ribs." 
 
 22. The cavity formed by the sternum, ribs, and spinal 
 column, is called the Chest. It contains the heart, iungs, and 
 large blood-vessels. 
 
 23. The shape of the chest is conical, or like a sugar-loaf. 
 
 Fig. 3. The lonii of the chest. ',2,3, The stennim, (breast-bone.) 4, 3, The 
 ■pinal coluirin, (back-bone.) 6, 7, 8, 9, The first rib. 10, The seventh rib. 11, The 
 cartilage of the third rib. 13, The floating ribs. 
 
 Observation, The lower part of the chest is broader and 
 fuller than the upper part, when it is not made smaller by tight 
 clothing. 
 
 The next three ? What are the last L^o called ? Why ? Describe flg. S. 
 " 22. How is the chest formed ? What does it contain ? 23. What is th» 
 shape of the chest } How does the lower part of the chest compare in 
 •ixe with the upper? 
 
 2 ,,'-■■;. - ,:--:-.zk,'''' 
 
M 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE 
 
 24. llie SPINAL* COLUMN IS composcd of twenty-four 
 pieces of bone. Each piece is called a vert'e'bra. 
 
 25. Uetween the pieces, or vertebra;, is a thick piece of car- 
 tilage, which is elastic, or springs like India-rubber. This not 
 only unites the vertebiTc, but pernnits them to move in diflerent 
 ways. 
 
 26. There is an opening in each vertebra. By a union of 
 these openings, a canal is formed the whole length of the spinal 
 column in which the spinal cord (pith of the back-bone) is 
 placed. 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 Fig. 5. 
 
 Fig 4. The form of a vertebra of iho neck. 1, The main portion of Ite bona. 
 2, 'I'he spinal canal, in which tJie spinal cord is placed. 4, 5, 7, 8, Points, < projto 
 liuns of ihe vertebra. 
 
 r=3, 5. 1, The cartilage that c mnects the vertcbree. 3, 4, 5, 6, Points, r pro- 
 jections of the vertebra. 7, The Hpinal canal. 
 
 Observation. A good idea of the structure of the vertehraj 
 may be obtained, by examining the spinal column of a domestic 
 animal, as the dog, cat, or pig. 
 
 • From the Latin spi'na, a thorn ; so called from the points of tfe.» 
 rertebrae that are felt beneath the skin. 
 
 24. How many pieces of bone in the spinal column ? "What is each 
 piece called ? 2.5. What is placed between the vernebrie ? Give its use. 
 26. How is the spinal canal formed, and what does it contain ? Describe 
 fig. 4. Describe fig 5. How may an idea of the structure of th* Terte* 
 OIK be obtained 2 
 
ANATOMY OF THE BONES 
 
 1» 
 
 27. I'he spinal column is a very curious and perfect piece 
 of mechanical art. By its structure, great strength and suf- 
 fijiient movement or tiexibility are combined. The vertebrfla 
 are so firmly joined together, that dislocation of tliem, without 
 fracture, is very rare. 
 
 28. The PELVIS is composed of four bones. They are so 
 arranged as to form a bony basin. Tlie spinal column testa 
 on these bones, and they also serve to support the lower 
 extremities. 
 
 Fig. 6. 
 
 Pig. 6. 1, 1, The hip-bones. 2, The sacrum, wynm which the Hpinal coiumn 
 re Its. 3, Tlie extremity of the spinal column, named the coc'cyz. 4, 4, The cavitiea 
 for the head of the tliigh bone. 
 
 29. In the sides of these bones is a deep, round cavity, 
 called a-ce-tabu-lum, in which the head of the thigh-bone ia 
 placed. 
 
 27. What is said of the structure of the spinal column ? 28. Of how many 
 bones is thr pelvis composed ? What is their use ? Describe fig. C 
 Hi. Wiiat is found in the bidea of these bones ? 
 
16 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYOIENB. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE BONES, CONTINUED. 
 
 30 The upper extremities contain sixty-four bones — 
 the Scap'ii-la^ (shoulder-blade;) the Clav'i-ch^ (collar- bone;) 
 and the bones of the Arm^ Fore-arm^ Wrist^ and Hand. 
 
 31. The SCAPULA is a broad, irregular bone, situated upon 
 the upper and back part of the chest. 
 
 32. The CLAVICLE is a thin bone at the base of the neck. 
 It IS joined at one extremity to the sternum, at the other to 
 the scapula. 
 
 Observation. The use of the clavicle is to keep the arms 
 from sliding toward the breast. Children should frequently 
 throw their arms backward, as t'^ s exercise would tend to 
 increase the length of this bone, am nlso to enlarge the chest. 
 
 33. The ARM is formed of a su.^ > bone, called the hu'' 
 mer-us. 
 
 34. The FORE-ARM is formed of two bones — the w/'nrt, on 
 the inner side, and the ra'di-us., on the outside, (the side on 
 which the thumb is placed.) By a beautiful arrangement of 
 these bones, the hand is made to rotate^ or turn, permitting ita 
 complicated and varied movements. 
 
 35. The WRIST is formed of eight irregular bones. They 
 move but little upon each other. 
 
 36. The HAND consists of nineteen bones — five in the palm, 
 and fourteen bones in the fingers and thumb. * 
 
 30 — 37. Give the anatomy of the hones of ihc upper extremities. 30. Name 
 the bones of the upper extremities. 31. Describe the Sv?apula. 32. "Where 
 is the clavicle situated ? \Vliat is the use of the clavicle ? 33. How ia 
 the arm formed ? 34. The fore-arm ? 35. How many bones in the wrist ? 
 86. How many bores in the hand ? 
 
ANATOMY OP THE BONES. 
 
 17 
 
 37. Kach finger is formed of thr^e bones of diflerent lengths 
 the thumb has but two. Proofs of a designing Creator aro 
 nowhere more manifest than in the simple but wonderful 
 structure and adaptation of the human hand. 
 
 38. The LOWER extremities contain sixty bones — the 
 Fe'mur^ (thigh-bone ;) the Pa-tel'la^ (knee-pan ;) the Tib'i-a 
 (shin-bone;) \\ie Fib'u-la^ (small bone of the leg;) and the 
 bones of the Foot. 
 
 39. The FEMUR is the longest bone of the body. It sup- 
 ports the weight of the head, trunk, and upper extremities. 
 
 Fig. 7. 
 
 Fig. 8. 
 
 Fig. 7. V, The nlna. R, The radiui. s, L, c, P, U, M, T, T, The eight bones «l 
 the wrist. 1> 1, 1, 1, 1, The five bones of the pjilm of the hand. 
 
 Fig. 8. 10, 10, 10, Tile bones of the palm of the hand 11, 13, 13, The bonea of 
 (he fingers. 14, 15, The bones of the thumb. 
 
 40. The TIBIA and the fibula are situated between the 
 knee and ankle. 
 
 37. What is said of the bones of the fingers and thumn ? 38 — 41. Qiv 
 the anatomy of the bonea of the lower extremities. 38. Name th« 
 oonfs of the liwer extremities. 39. "What is said of the femur? 
 
 Describe fig. 7. 
 anUe? 
 
 Fig. 8 40. What bones between the knee and 
 
J8 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 41. Th« FOOT is formed of twenty-six bones --seven in the 
 instep ; five in the middle of the foot; and fourteen toe-Dones. 
 
 Observation. Tlie bones of the foot ore so united as to give 
 it the form of an arch, — convex on its upper surface, and con- 
 cave on the lower surface. 
 
 Fig. 9. 
 
 Fig. 9. A view of the upper surfnce of the Ijones of the foot. 1, 2, 3, 4,5, 8, T 
 8, The bones of the instep. 9, 9, 9, Tlie boncfl of the middle of the foot. 10, 11, Th« 
 bonea of the great toe. 12, 13, 14, The boaea of the siiiull toea 
 
 Fig. 10 
 
 P (?. 10. A Bide view of the bones of the foot, showing its arched form. The arch 
 rests upon the htel behind, Rnd the baU of the toes in front. I, Tnt lower i«rt of the 
 tibia. 2, 3, 4, 5, Runes of the instep. 6, A bone of the middle of the foot. 7, 8, The 
 bones of tlie great toe. 
 
 ♦ 
 
 42. The bones consist of animal matter, (jelly,) and earthy 
 matter, (phosphate and carbonate of lime.) 
 
 41. How many bones in the foit, and name them ? What is the form 
 3f the foot? Describe fig. 9. Fig. 10. 42. Of what are the bonec 
 •omposed? » ^ ^, :,'„ 
 
ana:omy op the bones. 
 
 19 
 
 43. To show the cinitnal without the eurthy matter of the 
 bones, immerse a slender bone tor a few days in a weak aciu, 
 (one part muriatic acid and six parts water,) and it can then 
 be bent in any direction. 
 
 44. To show the earthy without the animal matter, bum a 
 bone in a clear fire for about fifteen minutes, and it becomet 
 white and brittle. 
 
 45. The JOINTS form an interesting part of the body. They 
 are composed of the extremities of two or more bones, Car'li- 
 ingcc^ '.<?ristles,) Syn-o'vi-al membrane, and Lig'a-ments 
 
 Fig. 12. 
 
 *«<•.■ 
 
 Fig. 11. The relative position of the tmiie, rartilnge, and synovial membrans. 
 1, 1, The extreiiiities of two bones, to form a joint. 9, 2, The cartilage that coven* 
 the end of the bone. 3, 3, 3, 3, The synovial membrane, winch cover:) the cnrtiluge 
 of both bones, and is Uien doubled back from cue to the other ; It is represented by 
 the dotted lines. 
 
 Fig. 12. A vertical section of the' knee-joint 1, The femur. 3, The patella 
 5. Th.? tibia. 2, 4, Ligaments of the patella. 6. Cartilage of the til)ia- 12, The 
 cartilage of the femur. * « * *, The synflvial membrane. 
 
 46. Cartilage is a smooth, solid, elastic substance, that 
 covers the ends of the bones that form a joint. It prevents 
 the ends of the bones from wearing off, and also diminishes 
 tlie jar that the joint receives, in walking or leaping. 
 
 - 43. How can the animal matter be shown ? 44. The earthy ? 45— 18. D« 
 tcribe the parts that form aJoiiU. 4.5. AVhat is said of the joints ? Of what 
 bre they composed ? What is represented by fig. 11 ? Fig. 12 ? 46. Defina 
 cartilage. 'W^.iat is its use i 
 
 mm 
 
2() 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 47. The SYNOVIAL ^xi:MBRANE is a thin, membranous layer 
 which covers the cartilages, and is thence bent back, or reflected 
 upon the inner surfaces of the ligaitients which surround and 
 enter into the composition of tho jomts. This inembrano 
 forms a », osed sac. (Fig. 11.) 
 
 48. The LIGAMENTS are strong, in'^lastic suostances ; th«y 
 serve to connect and bind together the bones of the body. 
 
 Fig. 13. 
 
 Fig. 14. 
 
 Pig. 13. 8, 9, The ligaments that extend flrom the hip-bone (6) to the thigli' 
 tme, (5.) 
 
 Fig. 14. 2, 3,' The ligaments that extend from the collar-bone (I) to the shouldef 
 DiHile, (4.) The ligaments 5, 6, extend from the shoulder-blade to the first bona 
 vf the arm. 
 
 Observation. The joints of the domestic animals, are similar 
 in their construction to those of man. To illustrate this part of 
 the body, a fresh joint of the calf or sheep may be used. 
 
 47. Define synovial membrane. 48. What are ligaments ? Wbat is 
 their use ? What is represented bv fig 13 ? Fig. 14 ? How oan the etruo* 
 turo of the joints be illustrated 
 
PHYitlOLOQir OF THE BONES. 21 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF lilS BC'^li«. 
 
 4&. The bones are the frumework of iho body. They sup- 
 port 'all the soA parts, as the flesh and vessels, and likewise 
 afford a firm surface for the attachment of the ligaments. 
 
 50. The use of the various bones is different. Some protect 
 organs, as those of the skull and chest, while others are used 
 when we move, as those of the extremities and spinal column. 
 
 51. The bones are covered with a firm mem'brane, or skin, 
 called per-i-os'te-um. This membrane and the bones, when 
 healthy, give us but little pain if wounded ; but. if diseased, as 
 in " felons," the pain is very severe. 
 
 52. The joints are constantly supplied with a fluid called 
 syn-o'vi-a. This operates like oil on the joints of a machine. 
 By the smooth cartilages and synovia, the joints are enabled 
 to bear all the motion required of them during a great number 
 of years. 
 
 53. The joints vary in their functions. Some are movable, 
 as the finger-joints ; while others are immovable, as the sutures 
 of the skull. 
 
 54. The union of the spinal column with the skull exhibits 
 one of the most ingenious contrivances to be met with in the 
 body. 1st It permits the backward and forward movement, 
 as in bowing and nodding the head. 2d. The motion which 
 is made in turning the head from side to side. 
 
 49 — 61. Give the physiology of the hones. 49. What is the use of the 
 bones ? 60. Give the function of some of the bones. 61. With what are 
 the bones covere 1 ? 62 — 66. dive the physiology of the joints. 62. With 
 what are the joints constantly supplied ? What is the use of this fluid 
 and the cartilages ? 63. Mention some of the functions of the joints. 
 64. What is said of the union of the spinal column with the skull? 
 
 ^iMiiiiitiiMiiiiiiBr^"^-^-^'"^'^"-^^- 
 
 Ss 
 
22 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 65. This admirable piece of mechanism aflbrds great pro- 
 tection to the spinal cord, at the top of the neck ; ti'is being 
 perhaps, the most vital portion of the whole body. Injury to 
 it, or pressure upon it, is instantly fatal. 
 
 56. Some joints move but in one direction, like a hinge of a 
 door. These are called Hinge Joints ; as the ankle and the 
 knee-joint. Some joints move in difFerent directions, like a ball 
 in a socket. These are culled Ball and Socket Joints ; as the 
 fhoulder and the hip-joint. 
 
 Fig. 16. 
 
 Fig. 16. 
 
 Fig. 15. The knee-JoinU 1, The lower extremity of the thighbone, a, 5, The 
 two rounded extremities that rest upon the upper extremity of the tibia, (shin-bone.) 
 S. Two ligaments within the knee-JoinL 6, 7, The cartilage that tips the uppei 
 extremity of the tibia, (4.) 
 
 Pig. 16. 2, The deep socket of the hip-joint. .5, The round head of the thigh- 
 bone, which ii lodged in ''e socket. 3, The ligament within the socket. 
 
 
 Observation. The more movable a joint, the less firm it is, 
 and the more frequently dislocated, or " put out." It is for this 
 reason that the shoulder-joint is more frequently displaced than 
 any other in the body. 
 
 65. What is protected by this admirable piece of mechanism ? 66^ What 
 •re hinge joints ? What are ball and socket joints ? Why is the shouldtfT> 
 Joint more frequently dislocated than any other in th>^ body i 
 
|»P»v8'Ol,OGY OF THE BONES. 
 Fig. 17. 
 
 2f^ 
 
 '■W 
 
 P»g 17. 1,1, The spinal column. 2, TheFkuIl. 3, The lower jaw. 4, The sternam. 
 \ The libs. 6,G, The carMlagCH of the ribs. 7, Tl,e clavicle. 8, The humerus. 9, Th« 
 rhoulder-JoinC 10, The radius. 11, The ulna. Vi, The elbow-joint 13, The wriat. 
 U, The hand. 15, The luuinch-bone. IG, The sacrum. 17, The hip-joint. 18, The 
 thigh-bone. 19, The patfll.i. 20, The knee-joint. 21, The fibula. 22, The tibia. 
 23, The ankle-joint. 24, The foot 2.";, 2ti, The lignnients of the clavicle, Rtemum, 
 and ribs. 27, 28, 29, The ligaments of the shoulder, elbow, and wrist. 30, The larfe 
 Kitery of the arm. 31, The ll^ainentsof the hi|>-joint. 'M, The largo bl(M>d-VMwbior the 
 fhigh. 33, Thearterj'ofthelei^. 34, 35, 3(3, The iigauienlsufthe patella, kne«, and ankla. 
 
 A'd(£. Let the pupil, in form of topics, review the anatomy and physiology of Jm 
 ^nes from fig. 17 or from anatomical outline plateb 1 and 3. 
 
14 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY. ANU BTOIXNX. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE BONES. 
 
 67. The hones require exercise to make them healthy. By 
 use they arc iiicr ased in size and strength to a limited extent, 
 while inaction or disease weakens them. Exercise favors the 
 deposition of the substances of which they are composed. 
 
 58. The exercise or labor should he adapted to the condition 
 of the hones. The bones of a child contain more of the animal 
 than the earthy matter, and are consequently weak ; though 
 the child is able to exercise, its bones are not adapted to severe 
 toil. On the other hand, the bones of the aged man contain 
 more earthy than animal matter. This causes them to be brit- 
 tle and unfit for labor. But in middle age, the proportions of 
 animal and earthy matter are, usually, such as to give the 
 proper degree of flexibility and strength for labor, with little 
 liab lity to injury. 
 
 Ohservation. The difference in the structure of the bonea 
 at different ages may be seen, by comparing the rib of a calf 
 or lamb, with the rib of an ox or sheep. 
 
 59. The clothing should he loosely worn. The ribs and 
 bones of the spmal column are soft and yielding in childhuod. 
 A small amount of pressure on the walls of the trunk will 
 lessen the size of the chest, and thus injure the lungs, stomach, 
 and heart 
 
 60. In sittings the feet of the child should he supported. If 
 
 67—63. Give the hygiene of the bone*. 67. What effect has exerciw 
 upon the bones ? 68. Give the reasons why the amount of labor should be 
 adapted to the condition of the bones. How can the difference in the 
 structure of the bones at different ages be illustrated ? 69. Give a reason 
 why the clothing should be loosely worn. 60. Why should the feet of 
 ihildren, when sitting, be supported ? »;:.*;«. 
 
 ;ii*; 
 
nVGIENK OF THE BONES. 
 
 35 
 
 ihe stool IS so hi^h as not to permit the feet to rest upon the 
 Hoor, the weight of the limbs below the luuie luiiy cause the 
 flexible hone of the thi^fh to becntne curved. When the feet 
 are not supported, the child is inclined to lean forward, contract- 
 ing an injurious and ungraceful position. 
 
 Observation. The scats in school-rooms should not only be 
 of such height as to enable the pupil to rest the feel on tlio 
 floor, but they should have properly-constructed backs. 
 
 Fig. 19. 
 
 Fig. 18. The position ossuined when the leat ia of proper height, and the feet 
 
 buppiirtcd. 
 
 Fig. 19. The position a child naturally assumes when Uie seat ia so high tliat Mm 
 feet are not 8u;)ported. 
 
 61. Children should stand and sit erect. This position tends 
 '.o keep the spinal column erect and healthy. When a slight 
 cur/ature of the spine exists, it can be improved by walking 
 with a book, or a heavier weight, upon the top of the head ; tq 
 
 Should seats in a school-room have backs ? 61. Wliy should childrea 
 •land and sit erect ? 
 
 a 
 
26 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 ba!7*iice which, the spine must be nearly erect. Thosfi people 
 that carry their burdens upon their heads se'dom have crooked 
 spines. * 
 
 62. Pupils, while writing, drawing, and sometimes while 
 studying, frequently incline the spinal column to one side, in 
 order to accommodate themselves to the desks at which they 
 are seated. This position elevates one shoulder, while i t de- 
 presses the other. 
 
 ; , Fig. 20. 
 
 Fig. ^X A representation of . deformed spinal column. A well-Armed spinal 
 column has three curves, two forward und one bucliward, (2, 2, 2, fig 25,} but no 
 lateral curvature, (1, 1, Ag. 17.) 
 
 63. One shoulder may be thus elevated for a short time, and 
 no injurious results follow, prrivided care is taken not to keep it 
 in the raised position too long, or if the opposite shoulder is 
 elevated for the same period of time. 
 
 What is the effect of carrying biirdens upon the head ? 62. What is tht 
 effect of pupils using desks that are too Itigh or improperly constructed 
 6S. How can one shoulder b« elevated, Aud *o injurious results follow ? 
 
ANATOMY OF THE MUSCIES. 
 
 27 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 THE MTJSCLES. 
 
 « 
 
 64. All the great motions of the body are caused by the 
 movement of some of the bones which form the framework of 
 the body ; but these, independently of themselves, have not llie 
 power of motion, and only change their position through the 
 action of other organs attached to them, which, by contracting, 
 or shrinking, draw the bones after ihem. In some of the slight 
 movements, as the winking of the eye, no bones are displaced, 
 or moved. These movmg, contro 'ting organs are the Mus'ch^y 
 (lean meat) "* 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE MUSCLES. 
 
 65. A MUSCLE is composed of many little strings, called 
 fibres. Some of these fibres run in straight lines ; others 
 spread like a fan ; while some are inclined like the feathery 
 part of a quill. (Fig. 21.) 
 
 66. Toward the extremities of a muscle the fibres unite, and 
 form a substance of a whitish color, harder and tougher than 
 the muscle. This is called ten'don^ (cord, sinew.) 
 
 Observation. TI t pupil can examine a piece of boiled 
 beef, or the leg of a fowl, and -^ee the structure of the fibres 
 and tendons of a muscle, with the attachment of the tendons 
 tc the bones. 
 
 67. Tendons have various shapes. Sonie*imes tt.'iy are 
 
 94. Ilovy are all the great motions of the body produced ? What are 
 these moving, contracting organs called ? 65 — 72. Give the structure of the 
 muaclea. 65. Of what is a muscle composed ? 66. What in a tendon ? 
 How can the structure of a muscle be shown ? 67. Wliat is the shape ol 
 tendons ? 
 
m 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 long, slender strings; sometimes they are short and thck 
 again, in some situations, they are thin and broad. Thej serve 
 to fasten the muscles to the bones, or to each other. 
 
 Observation. In some instances, the synovial membrane, 
 which forms the sheath of the tendons, is ruptured, and the 
 synovial fluid escapes. This forms a tumor, called a gan'gli-on, 
 (weeping sinew.) It is called a wind-gall when on the limbs 
 of a horse. 
 
 68. in tha description of a muscle, its attachments are ex- 
 piessbd by the terms origin and instrlion. The term origin is 
 general Jy applied to the more fixed or centml attachment, or to 
 the points toward which motion is directed ; while insertion is 
 assigned to the more movable point, or to that most distant from 
 the centre. The middle, fleshy portion, is called the " belly,'* 
 or swell. 
 
 Fig. 21. 
 
 Pig. 21. I, Represents the fibres of a muscle running in straight lines. S, Th« 
 Ibn-shaped fibres. 3, 4, Fibres inclined like the plumes of a quill, t, (, Tendons a* 
 the extremities of the muscle, L 
 
 69. In some parts of the body, there is but one layer of 
 muscle over the bones ; in other parts, there are five or six 
 
 How are the tumors formed, called weeping sinews ? 68. How are the 
 attachments of muscles expressed ? What is the middle portion called ^ 
 69. How many layers of muscles aie there around the bones ? 
 
,p--.-Ty,».-7jr-T--i;'-'^r>-^yv- -Tr.-,. 1.7 t ..y-^r-, "■■■.■--•■'; v ,•,> - ' ■ ''W^Jij .••■:::^.\ 
 
 AN.? rOMY OF THE MUSCLES. 95 
 
 layers, ona muscle being placed over another. They are sepa- 
 rated by a tiiin, whitish membrane, ciUlcd fas'ci-a. 
 
 Observation. An instance is seen in the membrane which 
 envelops a leg of beef, and which is observed on the edges 
 cf Pi slice when it is cut for broiling. 
 
 70. In general, the muscles form about the bones two 
 layeiTJ, calleo the superficial^ or external muscles ; and the 
 deep-seated^ or those nearest the bone. 
 
 71. There are more than four hundred muscles in the 
 human body. To these, and a yellow substance, called fat^ 
 that surrounds and fills the spaces in the muscles, the child 
 and youth are indebted for the roundness and hearty of their 
 limbs. 
 
 Observation. When we are sick, and cannot take food, the 
 / is {*;d with ihis fat. The removal of it into the blood 
 causes the sunken cheek, hollow eye, and prominent appear- 
 ance of the bones, after a severe sickness. 
 
 72. When we look at this "harp of thousand strings," and 
 notice the varied, rapid, complicated, yet accurate movements 
 it performs in a single day, our thoughts are lost in wonder, in 
 contemplating this superb and mtricate machine, framed and 
 finished by the divine Architect 
 
 How are they separated from each othor? Give an instance where thia 
 membrane may be seen. 70. How many lav«»rs of Tuscles generally around 
 the bones, and M-hat are they called ? 71. How m»nv n)i|iu>l<>s in the hu 
 man body? "W* y are the limbs of a child nu a rntind and full thar ws 
 aged ptTSOo'f ? How is the body nourished whca wc ctioTiot t«k<« toodk * 
 
W ANATOMY PnySIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE MUSCLES. 
 
 73. Every motion of the body is made by the contraction 
 of the fibres of the muscles ; from the awkward movement 
 of the boy's first efibrt at penmanship, to the delicate and 
 graceful sweeps of the pianist ; from the firm, the stately tread 
 of the soldier, to the light, fairy-like step of the danseuse. 
 
 Illustration. The muscles ami tendons are to the bones 
 what the ropes are to the sails and yards of a sh'p. By their 
 action, the direction of the sails and yards is chanj^ed. So, by 
 the action of the muscles, the position of the bones of the body 
 is changed. 
 
 74. Each fibre of the several muscles receives from the 
 brain, through the nervous filament appropriated to it, a certaiu 
 influence called nervoiis fluid ^ or stimuhis. It is this that in- 
 duces contraction, while the suspension of this stimulus causes 
 relaxation of the fibres. 
 
 75. Muscles remain contracted but a short time ; then they 
 relax, or lengthen, which is their rest. When the muscles are 
 in a state of contraction, they are full, hard, and more prom- 
 inent than when relaxed. 
 
 76. The alternate contraction and relaxation of the muscles 
 may be shown by the following experiment: — 
 
 Experiment. Clasp the fore-arm about three inches below 
 the elbow, then open and shut the fingers rapidly, and the 
 
 73 — 99. Give the physiology of the miiscles. 73. How is every motion of 
 the body produced ? 74. With what is each muscular fibre supplied ^ 
 What effect has this stimulus on the muscles ? 75. Do muscles remain 
 crntracted a long time ? What is their appearance when in a state of con- 
 traction ? 76. How can the aU«rnate contraction and relaxation of the 
 muscles be shown ? 
 
 ^-V'-XP'l 
 
rnvsioLOGY of titk muscles. 
 
 81 
 
 Bwelling and relaxation of tlie muscles on the opposite sides of 
 *he arms, alternately with each other, will be felt correspond 
 ing with the movement of the fingers. While the fingers are 
 bending, the nside muscles swell and the outside ones become 
 flaccid ; and, while the fingers are extending, the inside mus- 
 cles relax and the outside ones swell. The altornate swelling 
 and relaxation of opposing muscles may be felt in all the move- 
 ments of the limbs. 
 
 Fig. 22. 
 
 2 4 
 
 t rejrrenentation of the manner in which all nf the joints of the body are m6V«d. 
 
 Fig. 22, 1, The bone of the arm above the elbow. 2, One of the bones below fh« 
 ilbow. 3, The muscle that bends tlie elbow. This muscle is united, by » tendon, to 
 the bone below the elbow, (4 ;) at llie other extremity, to the bone above the elbow, 
 (5.) 6, The muscle that extends the elbow. 7, Up attachment to tlie point of the 
 eJbow. 8, A weight in the hand, to be raised. ' .le central part of the musc!e (3) 
 contracts, and its two ends are brought nearer together. The bones beh»w the elbow 
 are brought to the lines shown by 9, 10, II. The weight is raised in the direction of 
 the curved line. When the muscle (6) contracts, the muscle (3) relaxes, and the el- 
 bow is extended. 
 
 77. The eyebrows are elevated, or raised by the contraction 
 of the muscles on the forehead, 1, fig. 23. 
 
 78. The eyes ar^ closed by the contraction of the muscles 
 that surround them, 2, fig. 23. 
 
 Explain 65?. 22. 
 Note. Let the anatomy and physiology of the muscular system be re 
 viewed, in form of topics, from figs. 23, 24, or from the outline anatomicft« 
 plates 3 and 4 
 
 ji 
 
M (ij'-pi ■■(■iiiiwi iijii.mi'.v f ! I. 
 
 82 ATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 79. The upper lip is elevated by the contraction of the mus- 
 cles, 3, 4, 5, 6, fig. 23. 
 
 80. The mouth is closed by the contraction of a muscle that 
 surrounds it, 7, fig. 23. 
 
 81. The lower lip is drawn down, or depressed, by the con 
 traction of muscles on the lower part of the face, 8, fig. 23. 
 
 82. The head is bent forward, as in nodding, by the contrac- 
 tion of muscles on the front part of the neck, 9, fig. 23.- 
 
 83. The chin is raised, and the head is brought erect by the 
 contraction of muscles on the back part of the neck, 5, 6, fig. 24. 
 
 84. I'he body is bent forward, and the ribs brought down, 
 by the contraction of muscles on the front and lower part of 
 the trunk, 22, 23, fig. 23. 
 
 85. The spinal column is kept erect by the muscles at the 
 lower and back part of the trunk, 24, 25, 26, fig. 24. 
 
 86. The shoulders are brought forward by the muscles upon 
 the upper and (ront part of the chest, 11, fig. 23. 
 
 87. I'he shoulders are brought back by the contraction of the 
 muscles upon the upper and back part of tlie chest, 7, fig. 24. 
 
 88. The arm is elevated by a muscle upon the shoulder, 10, 
 fig. 23 ; and 8, fig. 24. 
 
 89. The arm is brought to the side by muscles, 11, fig. 23; 
 and 24, fig. 24 
 
 90. The elbow is bent by the contraction of the muscles on 
 the upper and front side of the arm, 14, fig. 23. 
 
 91. The elbow is extended by a muscle on the back part of 
 /he arm, 10, fig. 24. 
 
 92. The wrist and fingers are bent by the muscles on the 
 front part of the arm, below the elbow, 16, 18, fig. 23. 
 
 93. The muscles on the back part of the arm, below the 
 elbow, extend the wrist and fingers, 21, 22, 23, fig. 24. 
 
 94. The muscles that bend the lower limbs, at the hip, are 
 situated at the lower and front part of the trunk, and the upper 
 and front part of the thigh, 25, 26, 27, 28, fig. 23. 
 
 
PHYSIOLOGY OF THE MUSCLES. 
 
 38 
 
 95. The lower limbs are extended at the hips by the 
 muscles on the lower and back part of the trunk, and the uppei 
 and back part of the thigh, 27, 2b, fig. 24. 
 
 96. The muscles upon the front part of the thigh extend the 
 leg at the knee, 29, 30, fig. 23. 
 
 97. The knee is bent by the muscles upon the back part of 
 the thigh, 29, 30, fig. 24. 
 
 98. The muscles upon the fore part of the leg, below the 
 knee, bend the foot at the ankle, and extend the toes, 34, 35, 
 36, fig. 23. 
 
 99. The muscles upon the back part of the leg, below the 
 knee, extend the foot at the ankle, and bend the toes, 31, 32 
 33, fig. 24. 
 
 Observation. It would be a profitable exercise for pupils to 
 press their fingers upon prominent muscles, and, at the same 
 time, vigorously contract them, not only to learn their situations, 
 but their use ; as the one that bends the arm, 14, fig. 23. 
 
 [Fig. 23. A front view of the muscles of the body. 1, The frontal swells of the 
 occipito-frontalis. 3, The orbicularis palpebrarum. 3, The levator labii superioria 
 alteque nasi. 4, The i^ygomaticua major. 5, The zygoniaticus minor. 6, The 
 mosseter. 7, The orbicularis oris. 8, The depressor labii Inferioris. 9, I'he {ilatysma 
 myoides. 10, The deltoid. 11, The pectornlis major. 13, Thb latissimus dursi 
 13, The serratus major anticus. 14, The biceps flexor cubiti. 15, The triceps ex- 
 tensor cubiti. 16, The supinator radii longus. 17, The pronator radii um cm. 18, The 
 extensor carpi radialis longior. 19, The extensor oasis metacarpi pollicis. 30, The 
 nnnular ligament 31, The palmar fascia. 33, The obliquuit externus abdominis. 
 23, The linea alba. 24, The tensor vagine femoris. 26, The psoas magnua 
 27, The abductor longus. 38, The sartorius. 39, The rectus femoris. 30, The 
 vastus externus. 31, The vastus Internus. 32, The tendo patella;. 33, The gas- 
 trocnemius. 34, The tibialis auticus. 35, The tibia. 36, The tendons of the ex 
 tensor communis. 
 
 Fig. 24. A back view of the muscles of the body. 1, The temporalis. 2, The 
 occipito-frontalis. 3, The complexus. 4, The splenius. 5, The masseter. 6, Tli* 
 ■tcrno^^leido mastoideus. 7, The trapezius. 8, The deltoid. 9, The infra spinatus. 
 ;0, The triceps extensor. 11, The teres minor. 12, The teres major. 13, The 
 tendinous portion of the triceps. 14, The anterior edge of the triceps. 15, The 
 supinator radii longus. 16, The pronator radii teres. 17, The extensor conuniinit 
 digitorum. 18, The extensor oesis metacarpi pollicis. 19, The extensor comniunia 
 •ligitorum tendons. 20, The olecranon and in.sertion of the triceps. 21, The exten* 
 ■or tarpi ulnads. 22, The auricularis. 23, The extensor communis. 24, The Litis 
 ■imus dcrsi. 2.% Its tendinous origin. 26, Tlie obliquus externus. 27, The ghitei'j 
 medius. 28, The gluteus magnus. 29, The biceps flexor cruris. 30, Tne semi-tea 
 dinoflus. 31, 32, The gastrocnemiua. 33, Tlie tendo- Achillis.] 
 
 y* 
 
 --.•i^^'M '■ • 
 
34 ANATOMY, niYSlOLOGY, ANH HYGIENB. 
 
 Fig. 23. 
 
PHYSIOLOGY OF THE MITSCLBS. 
 
 35 
 
 Fig. 24. 
 
86 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, 4Nr> UtulEftm 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE MUSCLES. 
 
 100. Tlie muscles should he used and then rested. Tih* 
 will increase their size and strength, by increasing the flow oi 
 blood to the parts called into action A muscle should not be 
 used too long, or remain at rest too long ; both are alik« 
 injurious. 
 
 Illustrations. 1st The blacksmith uses and rests the mus- 
 cles of his arm when striking upon the anvil. They not only 
 become large, but very firm and hard. 
 
 2d. The student uses the muscles of the arm but little, in 
 holding his books and pen ; they are not only small, but soft. 
 
 3d. Let the student leave his books, and wield an iron sledge, 
 and the muscles of his arm will increase in size and firmness. 
 On the other hand, let the blacksmith assume the student's 
 vocation, and the muscles of his arm will become fioft and 
 less firm. 
 
 101. Exercise should he regular and frequent. The sys- 
 tem needs this means of invigoration as regularly as it does 
 new supplies of food. It is no more correct that we devote 
 several days to a proper action of the muscles, and then 
 spend one day inactively, than it is to take a proper amount 
 of food for several days, and then wi'/ iw this supply for 
 a day. 
 
 102. Every part of the muscular system should have its 
 appropriate share of exercise. Some employments call into 
 
 100 — 118. Give the hygiene of the muscles. 100. Why should every mu8 
 cle be used ? What is injurious to muscles ? How is the effect of using 
 muscles illustrated? 101. Why should the exercise of the muscles b« 
 regular and frequent ? 102. What employments and amusements are b«st 
 CDr ths health ? 
 
Il 
 
 AYGIENE OF THE MUSCLES. 89 
 
 exercise the muscles of the upper limbs, as shoe-making ; others 
 the muscles of the lower limbs; while some the muscles of l)oth 
 upper and lower limbs, with those of the trunk, as farming. 
 Those trades and kinds of exercise are most salutary, in which 
 all the muscles have their due propoition of action, as this tendi 
 to develop and strengthen them equally. 
 
 103. The proper time for exercise should be observed. This 
 is modified by many circumstances. As a general rule, the 
 morning, when the air is pure and the ground dry, is better than 
 the evening; for then, the powers of the body are greatest 
 We should avoid severe exercise and labor immediately before 
 and after eating a full meal, for the energies of the system are 
 then required to perform the digestive function. 
 
 104. Tlie muscles should be used in pure air. The purei 
 the air we breathe, the longer can the muscles be used in labor, 
 walking, or sitting, without fatigue and injury ; hence the bene- 
 fit derived in thoroughly ventilating all inhabited rooms. 
 
 Observation. It is a common remark that sick persons 
 will sit up longer when riding in a carrian;e, than in an easy 
 I chair in the room where they have Inn sick. In the one 
 
 instance, they breathe pure air, in th other, usually, a con- 
 fined, impure air. 
 
 105. The muscles should be exercised in the light. Light, 
 particularly that of the sun, exercises as great an influence on 
 
 I man as it does on plants. Both require the stimulus of this 
 
 I agent. Students should take their exercise during the day, 
 
 ■|i rather than in the evening, and the farmer and the mechanic 
 
 ;:| should avoid night toil, as it is much more exhausting than the 
 
 I same eflbrt during daylight. 
 
 I Illustrations. Plants that grow in the ^hade, as under a 
 
 I board, are of lighter color and more feeble than those that are 
 
 -^ Why? 103. What time, in general, is best for exercise? What should be 
 
 ^ avoided ? 104. Why should the muscles be used in pure air ? Give obser- 
 
 3. vation. 105. Why should students take their exercise in the davtime ? 
 
 M What should farmers and mechanics avoid ? Why ? How ia the iuftuenct 
 
 ^ of Bclar light illustrated ? 
 
 p 4 
 
 1 
 
88 ANATOMY, PnYSIOLOGV, AND IIVGIENE 
 
 exposed to tho lig it of the sun. Persons that dwell in dark 
 rooms, nro paler and less vigorous than those who inhabit 
 apartments well lighted, and exposed to solar light. 
 
 106. Every muscle should move freely. Compression by 
 any means, lessens the size and strength of the muscle. 
 
 Illustration. Let a surgeon bandage a limb for some weeks, 
 when a bone is broken, and when the bandage is removed, the 
 limb will be found smaller than when the accident occurred. 
 The compression by close dresses produces similar eflecis upon 
 the muscles of the body. 
 
 107. The state of the mind affeclb musailar contraction. A 
 person who is "heerful and happy will do more work, and with 
 less fatigue, than one who is peevish and unhappy. 
 
 Illustration. A sportsman will pursue his game miles with- 
 out fatigue, while his attendant, not having any mental stimu- 
 us, will become weary. 
 
 108. The erect attitude lessens the exhaustion of the muscles. 
 A person will stand longer, walk farther, and do more work, 
 wh«)n erect, than in a stooping posture; because the muscles 
 of the back, in stooping, are in a state of tension, or stretching, 
 to keep the head and trunk from falling forward. In the erect 
 position, the head and trunk are nicely balanced and supported 
 by the boncfc of tho spinal column, and the muscles of the back 
 are called but slightly into action. 
 
 Experiment. Hold in each hand a pail of water, or equai 
 weights, in a stooping posture, as long as it can be done with- 
 out much suffering and injury. Again, when the musculai 
 pain has ceased, hold the same weights, for the same length of 
 time, in an erect posture, and note the difTerence in the fatigue 
 of the muscles. 
 
 Ohsewation. The attitude of children in standing has been 
 
 106. Why should every muscle more freely ? How is the effect of com- 
 pression illustrated ? 107- Does the mind affect the action of the muscles ? 
 How is this illustrated ? 108. "What attitude lessens the exhaustion of thf 
 muscles ? Why ? How is the effect of position shown by experiment I 
 What is said respecting the attitude of child en ? 
 
HTOTENE OF THE MUSCLES. 
 
 »9 
 
 mur.h neglected ooth by parents and tcncliers. Let a child 
 acquire the habit of inclining his head ai d shoulders, and the 
 chest wi.l become contracted, the muscles of the back enfeebled, 
 and the deformity thus acquired will progress to advanced age 
 
 Fig. 25. 
 
 Fig. 26 
 
 Pig. 25. 1, A perpendicular line from the centre of the feet to the upper extrem- 
 ity of the opiiial column, where the head rests. 2, 2,2, The spinal coiamn, with its 
 three natural turves. Here the head nnd body arc Imlnnccd upon the spinni column 
 and jointib if the lower extremities, so that the muscles are not kept in n state of tcn- 
 i.)n. This erect position of the bmly and head is rlways accxnpanied with straight 
 lower limbs. 
 
 Fig 26. 1, A perpendicular line from the centre of the feet. 2, Represents th; un 
 natural curved spina column and its relative position to the perpendicular, (1.) The 
 lower limbs are seen curved at the knee, and the body is stooping forward. While 
 ■landing in this position, the muscles nf the lower limbs and back are in conl.nued 
 tension, which exhauat3 and weakens them. 
 
 What is represented by figs. 25 and 26 ? 
 
40 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE 
 
 109. Wfiile studying^ drawing, writing, and sewing, the 
 lody should be kept erect. This attitude favors a healthy action 
 of the various organs of the body, and conduces to beauty and 
 symmetry of form. On the contrary, narrow chests, " hollow 
 stomachs," " round shoulders," and ill health, follow a viola- 
 tion of this rule. 
 
 Fig. 27 
 
 Fig. 28. 
 
 Fig. 97. An improper, but not an unusual poaition in Bitting, 
 Fig. St>. A proper position in sitting. 
 
 1 10. Muscles should be gradually called into action. When 
 the muscular system has been in a state of rest, \i should not 
 suddenly be called into vigorous action. On arising from a 
 be 1, lounge, or chair, the first movements of the limbs should 
 be slow, and then, if necessary, gradually increased. 
 
 109. What is one cause of narrow chests and round shoulders ? 
 110. "What caution is given in using the rausclci when they have been iv 
 a sUte of rest ? What does fig. 27 show ? Fig. 28 ? 
 
-"V^ 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE MUSCLES. 41 
 
 Observation. If a man lias a certain amount of work to be 
 performed in nine hours, and his muscles have been in a state 
 of rest, he will do it with less fatigue by performing half the 
 amount of the labor in five hours, a d the remainder in four 
 hours. The same principle should be regarded in driving 
 horses and other beasts of burden. 
 
 111. Muscles should be rested gradually, when they have 
 been vigorously used. If a person has been making great 
 muscular exertion in cutting wood, or any other employment, 
 instead of sitting down to rest, he should continue muscular 
 action by some moderate labor, or amusement. 
 
 112. When the skin is covered with perspiration, (sweat,) 
 from muscular action, avoid sitting down " to cool " in a current 
 of air ; rather put on more clothing, and continue to exercise 
 moderately. 
 
 1 13. In cases when severe action of the muscles has been 
 endured, bathing and rubbing the skin over the joints that have 
 been used, are of much importance. This will prevei.t soreness 
 of the muscles and stiffness of the joints. 
 
 114. In labor, or exercise, the muscles should be relaxed. 
 In walking, dancing, and learning to write, there will be Jess 
 fatigue, and the inovements will be more graceful, when the 
 muscles are slightly relaxed, than when rigidly contracted. 
 The same principle applies to mo^t of the mechanical em- 
 ployments. 
 
 Experiments. Attempt to bow with the muscles of the 
 limbs and trunk rigid, and there will be a stiff bending of the 
 body only at the hip-joint. On the other hand, attempt to bow 
 with the muscles moderately relaxed ; the ankle, the ku e, and 
 
 Give observation. Should the same principle be observed in driving 
 horses ? Ill ^low should muscles be rested when they have been vigor- 
 ously used .•' 112. When the skin is covered with perspiration from muscu- 
 lar action, how should it be " cooled" ? 113. How can .screncss of the mus- 
 cles be prevented ? 114. In what state should be the muscles of the arm in 
 writing or performing most employments ? How is this principle shown by 
 ezperimente ! 
 
 4» 
 
12 ANATO^tfT, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 the hip-jomt will slightly bend, accompanied with an easy and 
 graceful curve of the body. 
 
 115. When riding in cars and coaches, the system will not 
 suffer so severely from the jar if the muscles are slightly 
 relaxed. When riding Dver uneven places in roads, rising 
 slightly upon the feet diminishes the shock occasioned by the 
 sudden notion of the carriage. The muscles, under such 
 circumstances, are to the body what elastic springs are to a 
 carriage. 
 
 116. In jumping or falling from a carriage, or any height, 
 the shock to the organs of the body may be obviated in the 
 three following ways. 1st. Let the muscles be relaxed, not 
 rigid. 2d. Let the limbs be bent at the ankle, knee, and hips ; 
 the head should be thrown slightly forward, with the trunk a 
 little stooping. 3d. Fall upon the toes, not the heel. 
 
 1 17. Repetition of muscular action is necessary. To render 
 the action of the muscles complete and effective, they must be 
 called into action repeatedly and at proper intervals. This 
 education must be continued until not only each muscle, but 
 every fibre of the muscle, is fully under tlie control of tlie will. 
 In this way, persons become expert penmen, singers, and 
 skilful in every emplojment. 
 
 1 18. In training the muscles for effective action, it is very 
 important that correct movements be adopted at the com- 
 mencement. If this is neglected, much power will be lost. 
 
 115. What suggestion when riding in cars or coaches ? 116. In jumpijtg 
 itam a carriage, in how many ways can the shock to the organs of the body 
 be obviated? Give the 1st. The 2d. The 3d. 117. How do persons be- 
 come expert penmen, singers, or skilful in any employment ? 118. What 
 is necessary m trailing the muscles for effective action i 
 
ANATOMY OF THE TEETH. 
 
 48 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE TEETH. 
 
 119. The teeth aio nrmly fixed in the sockets of the upper 
 and lower jaw. The first set, which appear in infancy, is 
 called tem'po-ra-ry^ or milk-teeth. They are twenty in num- 
 ber; ten in each jaw. 
 
 Fig. 29. 
 
 Fig. S9. The permanent teeth of the upper and !ower Jaw. a, b. The incisora. 
 c, The cuspi.^s. d, e, The bicuspids. /, g, The molars, (double teeth.) A, The 
 wisdom teeth. 
 
 120. Between six and fourteen years of age, the temporary 
 teeth are removed, and the second set nppeare, called per'ma- 
 nent teeth. They number thirty-two, sixteen in each jaw. 
 
 121. The four front teeth in each jav;^ are called in-ci'sors^ 
 
 119 — 123. Give the anatomy of the teeth. 119. In what are the teeth 
 placed ? What is the first set called ? How many in number ? Describe 
 feg. 29. 120. "Wlion are these teeth removed ? What is the second set 
 called ? How many in each j w ? 121. What are the teeth in front called ? 
 
44 
 
 ANATOMY, PIIYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 (cutting teeth ;) the next toofh on each side, the cus'pid^ (eye 
 tooth ;) the next two, bi-cus'pids, (small grinders ;) the next two 
 mo'lars, (grinders.) The last one on eacli side of the jaw, la 
 called a wisdom tooth., because it does not appear until a person 
 is about twenty years old. 
 
 122. Each tooth is divided into two parts; iiannely, crown 
 and root. The crown is that part which protrudes fronn the 
 jaw-bone and gum. The root, or "fang," is placed in the 
 sockets of the jaw. 
 
 Fig. 30. 
 
 Fig. 31. 
 
 Fig. 30. A side view of tlie body and enamel of a front tooth. 
 
 Fig. 31. A side view of a molar tooth. 1, The enamel. 2, The body of the. tooth 
 3, Theca.ity in the crown of the tooth. 4, A nerve that spreads in the pulp of the 
 tooth. 5, An artery that ramifies in tlie pulp of tlie tooth. 
 
 123. The crowns of the teeth are covered with a very hard 
 substance, called en-am'el. The roots consist of bony matter. • 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE TEETH. 
 
 124. The use of the teeth is twofold. 1st. By a cutting 
 and grinding movement, they divide the masses of food into 
 
 The next ? The next two ? Those next the bicuspids ? The last that 
 appear in thf jaw ? 122. How is each tooth divided ? "Which part of the 
 tooth is the crown ? Which the root ? 123. "With what ait the crowns 
 Df the teeth covered ? Of what docs the root consist ? Describe fig. 31. 
 424 — 126. Give ih£ physiology of the teeth. 124. What is one use of the teeth } 
 
HYGIENE OF THE TEETH. 45 
 
 smaller pieces, so tliat they are more easily and readily changed 
 in the stomach. 
 
 125. 2d. The teeth aid us in spr 'cing with distinctness 
 certain letters and word.-:. An individual who has lost his front 
 teeth cannot pronounce distinctly certain letters, called dental, 
 
 126. The teeth also give beauty to the lower part of the 
 face. When they are removed, the lips and cheeks sink in, as 
 is frequently seen in old age. Con.scfiuently, those sijiiple 
 observances that tend to the preservation of the teeth, are ol 
 practical interest to all persons. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE TEgTH. 
 
 127. To preserve the teeth^ they must be kept clean. After 
 eating food, they should be cleaned with a brush and water, or 
 rubbed with a piece of soft flannel, to prevent the tartar col- 
 lecting, and to remove the pieces of food that rnay have lodged 
 between them. 
 
 128. Tooth-picks may be useful in removing any particles 
 maccessible to the brush. They may be made of bone, ivory 
 or the common goosc-quill. Metallic tooth-picks should not bo 
 used, as they injure the enamel. 
 
 129. The whole mouth should be washed with pure, tepid 
 water, at night, as well as in the morning, after which the teeth 
 should be brushed upward and downward, both on the posterior 
 and anterior surfaces. It may be beneficial to use refined 
 soap once or twice every week, to remove any corroding suiv 
 stance that may exist around the teeth, care being taken to 
 thoroughly rinse the mouth after its use. 
 
 12.5, Give another use of these organs. 126. Dc they contribute to the 
 symmetry of the lower part of the face ? 127 — 132. Give the hygiem of the 
 teeth, 127. By what means can the teeth be preserved ? 128. What is said 
 of the use of tooth-picks ? 129. How often shouul the teeth be brushed ? 
 
V'' 
 
 46 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 130. Food or drink should not he taken into the mouth \ohen 
 very hot or very cold. Sudden changes of temperature will 
 crack the enamel, and, finally, produce decayed teeth. . 
 
 Observation. On this account, smoking is pernicious, be- 
 cause the teeth are subjected to an alternate inhalation of both 
 cold and warm air. 
 
 131. Care should he taken^ in childhood^ that the temporary 
 teeth be removed as soon as they become loose^ in order that the 
 second set of teeth may present a regular and beautiful appear- 
 ance. If a permanent tooth makes its appearance before the 
 first is removed, or has become loose, the milk-tooth, although 
 not loose, should be removed without delay. 
 
 132. If the teeth are crowded and irregular, in consequence 
 of the jaw being narrow and short, or when they press so hard 
 upon each other as to injure the enamel, remove one or more, 
 to prevent their looking unsightly and irregular, and in a few 
 months, the remaining teeth, with a little care, will fill the 
 spaces. 
 
 Observations. 1st. It is not always necessary to have teeth 
 extracted when they ache. The nerve may be diseased, and 
 the tooth still be sound. 
 
 2d. When it is ntcessary to have decayed teeth filled, it is 
 better for the health of the person and durability of the teeth, 
 to have them filled with gold foil. 
 
 130. What is the cause of decayed teeth ? Why is smoking injurioui 
 to the teeth? 131. What remarks respecting the temporary teeth? 
 132. Give other remarks in regard to the temporary teeth. Give obser- 
 vation Ist. Observation 2d. 
 
 
ANATOiifr or TUB DIGESTIVB OBOANB. 
 
 47 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 
 
 133. The food, whether animal or vegetable, has no resem- 
 blance to the bones, muscles, and other parts of the body to 
 which it gives sustenance. It must undergo certain essential 
 alterations before it can become a part of the diffcrcv* struc- 
 tures of the body. The first change is effected by tft? actioa 
 of the Digestive Organs. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 
 Fig. 32. 
 
 Fig. J2 A view of the salivary glands in their proper situations. 1, The parotid 
 gland 2, Its duct. 3, 7'he submaxillary gland. 4, Its duct. 5, The sublingual 
 gland, Drought to view by the removal of a section of the lower Jaw. 
 
 138. Has aniraal or vegetable food any resemblance to the different parts 
 ot the body to which it f^ives sustenance ^ By what organs is th» iu«t 
 change in the food effected ? Describe fig. 32. 
 
 ■f* 
 
n. 
 
 48 
 
 ANATOMY, PHTSIOLOQY, AND nYGIENl 
 
 134. Tho DIGESTIVE ORGANS are the Mouth, Teeth, SaVl 
 va-i-y Glands, Phar'ynx, (E-soph'a-ijiis, (gullet,) Stomach, 
 In-te^tines, ^bowels,) Lac'te-als, (milk or chyle vessels,) 
 Tho-ra(/ic Duct, Lit/er, and the Pan'cre-aa, (sweetbread.) 
 
 135. The MOUTH is an irregular cavity, which contains the 
 leeth and the organs of taste. 
 
 136. The SALIVARY GLANDS* are six in number; three 
 on each side of the jaw. They are called the pOrrotUd, 
 the suh-max'il-la-ry, and the suh-Un'gual. (Fig. 32.) 
 
 1 37. The PHARYNX is a mvuscular, membranous sac, that leadg 
 10 tile oesophagus. 
 
 Fig. 33. 
 
 I 
 
 r'ig. 33. A side view of the face, oesophagus, nnd tracben. 1, Zf The trachea 
 (wind-pipe) find larynx. 3, The ossophagiis. 4, 4, 4, The muscles of the upper pt)r- 
 tion of the (esophagus, forming the pharynx. 5, The muscles of the cheek. 6, Tie 
 muscle that surrouuds the mouth. 7, The muscle that forms the floor of the mouth 
 
 * See paragraph 234. 
 
 134 — 147. Give the anatomy of the dir/estive organs. 134. Name the 
 digestive organs. 135. Describe the mouth. 136. Describe the rsihvary 
 glanda. 137. What is the pharynx ? What doea fig. 33 represent ? 
 
ANATOMY OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 
 
 49 
 
 138. The CESOPHAGUS is a largo, momhranous tube, through 
 which the food and drink pass into the stomach. 
 
 139. The STOMACH * is in the left side of the body, below 
 the lungs and heart. It is composed of three coats, or mem- 
 branes, which are thin and yielding. The external is called 
 the se'rons ; the middle mus'cu-Iar ; the inner, mn'cnns. 
 
 Illustration. The three coulsof the stomach (anatomicallv^ 
 resemble tripe, which is a preparation of the largest stomach 
 of the cow or ox. The outer coat is smooth and highly 
 polished. The middle coat is comjujsed of minute threads, 
 which are arranged in two layers. The fibres of these layers 
 cross each other. The inner coat is soft, and presents many 
 folds, usually called " the honey-comb." 
 
 Fig. 34. 
 
 Fig. 34. The Inner emrface of the gtomach and duodenum. 1, The lower portion 
 of the oesophagus. 2, The opening through which the food is passed into the stomach 
 3, The stomach. 9, The opening throtigh which the food passes out of the stomach 
 into the duodenum, or upper portion of the Rmall intestine. 10, ;i, 14, The duode- 
 num. 12, 13, Ducts through which bile and pancreatic fluid pass into it, a, 6, «, The 
 three coats of the stomach. 
 
 For situation of the stomach, &c., see fig. 63. 
 
 138 What is the oesophagus. 139. Where is the stomach situated? 
 How many coats has it ? Name them. What Article prepared for food 
 does the slmnach resemble iq Btructute ? KxpUiin fig. 34. 
 
50 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE, 
 
 140. The INTESTINES, or alimentary canal, are diviJed into 
 two parts, the small and large. The small intestine is aboui 
 twenty-live feet in length. The upper and most important 
 division is called the Du-o-deJnnm. The large intestme is 
 about five feet in length. The largest division is callea the 
 Co'lon. 
 
 141. The DUODENUM (called by nurses the second stomach) 
 18 the most essential part of the small intestine. It is about 
 twelve inches in length, and commences at the lower orifico of 
 the stomach. 
 
 Fig- 35. 
 
 Fig. 35. 1,1, The duodenum. 2,3, Tho small intestine. 3. The conaectlon jI 
 Uie small and large inteBtine. 4, 5, 6. 7, 8, 9, 10, The large intestine. 6, 7, 8, 9, T6s 
 colon. 
 
 140. How are the intestines divided ? What is the length of the small 
 (kiteatine ? What is its lurgeat division culled ? What is the length of th« 
 large intestine ? What is its luigest division cal/cd ? 141. Describe the 
 duodenum. Explain fig. 35. 
 
/ h 
 
 /; 
 
 /.,/ 
 
 iV 
 
 /, 
 
 /v' 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 
 
 51 
 
 142. The LACTEALS are minute vessels, which open- upon tho 
 mucous surface of the small intestine. From the mtestne 
 they pass through small glands, {mes-en-ler'ic^) to the thuracio 
 diict 
 
 Fig. .3fi, 
 
 Fig. 36. A portion of C*^ "tnall intestine, lacteal vessels, mesenteric glands ani 
 thoracic duct. 1, The intestine. 2, 3, 4, Mesenteric glands, through which th» 
 lacteals pass to the thoracic duct. 5, 6, The thoracic duct. 7, The point in the neck 
 where it turns down to «*nter the vein at 8. 9, 10, The aorta. II, 13, Vessels of the 
 neck. 13, 14, 15, The large veins that convey the blood and chyle to the heart. 
 17, 17, The spinal colunriO. 18, The diaphragm, (midriff.) 
 
 142. What are lacteals ? Through what do they pass as they proceed t« 
 the thoracic duct ? Describe fig. 36. 
 
68 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, ANb HYGIENE. 
 
 143. The THORACIC duct commences behind the liver, ajid 
 ascends in front of the spinal column. At the lower part of 
 the neck, il turns downward and forward, and pours its con- 
 ten 5 into the vein behind the collar-bone. (8, fig. 36.) This 
 due is equal in diameter to a goose-quill. 
 
 144. The LIVER is in the right side of the body, below the 
 right lung. On tlie under side of this organ is a small sac, 
 which contains a yellow, bitter fluid, called bile^ (gall.) 
 
 Observation. The bile does not flow into the healthy stomach, 
 Dut into the duodenum. With many persons, the imagination is 
 biliouSy not the stomach. 
 
 145. The PANCREAS is a long, flattened organ, situated be- 
 hind and below the stomach. From it there flows a fluid into 
 the duodenum, called pan-cre-at'ic juice. 
 
 Obsenmlion. A good idea of the liver, pancreas, and intes- 
 tines can be obtained by examining these parts of a pig. In 
 this animal, the sacs or pouches of the large intestine are well 
 defined. 
 
 146. The i.T'LEEN, (milt,) so called because the ancients 
 supposed it to be the seat of melancholy, is an oblong, flattened 
 organ, situated in the left side, in contact with the stomach and 
 pancreas. Its use is not well determined. 
 
 147. The OMENTUM (caul) is composed of adipose matter, 
 (fat,) deposited between layers of serous membrane. It is 
 attached tq the stomach, and lies on the anterior surface of the 
 intestines. In some persons of gross habits, this deposit is very 
 great. 
 
 143. Describe -ourse of the thoracio duct. What is its size) 
 
 144. Describe ♦ What is found upon its under surface ? Give ob- 
 
 servation, jribe the pancreas. How may an idea of the liver be 
 
 obtaJned describe the spleen. Is its use well known ? 147. De- 
 
 scribe th<. .NiUtAUO. 
 
PHTSIv ^,v^Y OF TUB DIGESTIVE OBOAN8. 68 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OP THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 
 
 148. Substances received into the stomach as food, must 
 necessarily undergo many changes before they are fitted to 
 form part of the animal body. The solid portit)n8 arc reduced 
 to a fluid state, and those parts that will nounsii the body are 
 separated from the waste material. 
 
 149. The first change in the food is made in the mouth, by 
 the teeth, and the sa-li'va (spittle) from the salivary glands. 
 The teeth divide, while the saliva moistens and softens the food, 
 si that, when carried into the pharynx, it is passed, with ease, 
 thi ugh the GBsophagus into the stomach. 
 
 150. In swallowing, tlie food is pressed by the contraction 
 of the muscles 5, 6, 7, (fig. 33,) into the pharynx, from which 
 It is carried into the oesophagus, by the contraction of tho 
 muscles 4, 4, 4. As soon as the food is received into this Xuhe 
 its muscular coat contracts upon it successively \rom above 
 downward, and the alimentary ball is pressed onward into the 
 stomach. 
 
 Observation. The process of* swi"ov/ing, or deglutition, is 
 easily observed, when a person passes either liquid or solid 
 food into the stomach. 
 
 151. The nex* change in llie food is in the stomach. The 
 coats of the stomach contract, and the food is moved around, 
 while, at the same time, a peculiar fluid is suoplied by the 
 
 148 — 159. Give the icse of the digestive organs. 148 "Wh«* ia necessary 
 before food ran nourish ♦he body ? 149.' Describe the first chanj?e in the 
 food. 150. Give the process by which the food is passed into the stomach 
 H<*w may the process of swallowing be ooscrved ? 151. Where U tne 
 lecond change in the food effected ? How is it done i 
 5* 
 
54 ANATOMY, PHVSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENK. 
 
 Stomach, caUed gastric juice, which mixes with the food, and 
 reduces it to a soft, pulpy mass, called chyme. 
 
 152. This pulpy, grayish substance is passed into the duo- 
 denum, and, by the action of the bile and pancreatic juice, it is 
 changed into two parts — a milk-like substance, called c/iyZe ; 
 and re-sid'u-um, or waste matter. 
 
 153. The chyle and residuum pass from the duodenum i»^.to 
 the remaining portion of the small intestine, and are moved 
 along by a worm-like action of its parts. 
 
 154. As these two substances are moved along the intestine, 
 the chyle is sucked up by the lacteal vessels,* that pass through 
 the small intestine, and the residuum is carried into the large 
 intestine, and r cd from the system. 
 
 155. '^o recapitulate : In the adaptation of the food to the 
 wonts of the body, it is subjected to five different changes. 
 1st. It is changed in the mouth, by the action of the teeth and 
 saliva. This is called mastication. 
 
 156. 2d. By the action of the stomach and gastric juice, it 
 is changed into a pulpy, homogeneous mass. This is called 
 chymijication. 
 
 157. 3d. In the duodenum, the bile and pannreatic juice 
 change the chyme into chyle. This is called ckiflification. 
 
 158. 4th. By the action of the lacteal vessels and thoracic 
 duct, the chyle is poured into a vein behind the collar-bone, 
 and passes through the heart to the lungs ; here, by the action 
 of the air, it becomes blood. '(See Chap. XX.) 
 
 159. 5th. The separation and excretion of the residuum. 
 
 ♦ The chyle is changed by the lactcals and mesenteric glands, but 
 the nature of this change is not, as yet, well defined or understood. 
 
 152. What becomes of this pulpy substance? What change is effected 
 In the duodenum ? i.53. "Where do the chyle and residuum then pass ? 
 1/J4. What becomes of the chyle { Of the residuur^ ? 155. Recapitulate 
 the five changes in the digestive process. 
 
 Note. Let the pupil review the anatomy and physiology of the digestive 
 rgans, t'rom figs. 30 and 37, or from outline anatomical plate 6. 
 
tHYSlOLOGY OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 
 
 bk 
 
 Fig. 37. 
 
 Irig. 37. An ideal view of the organs of digeation, opened neatly the whole lenptlk 
 1, The uppei jaw. 2, TKj lower jaw. 3, The tongue. 4, The roof of the mouth. 
 5, The CBSophagus. 6, Thetraclica. 7, The parotid ghind. 8, The siiblingual gland. 
 », The stomach. 10, 10, Tlie liver. 11, The gall-cst, or sac. 12, The duct ti.at 
 conveys the bile to the luodtnum, (13, 13.) 14, The pancreas. 15, 15, 1.5, 15, Th« 
 ■mall intestine. 16, Tlie opening of the small intestine into the large intestitie 
 17, 18, 19, SO, The large intestine. 21, The spleen. '22, The upper part of tlie spine 
 column 
 
6tt ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENK. 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 
 
 160. The perfection of the digestive process, as well as tho 
 health of the body, requires the observance of certain condi- 
 tions. These will be considered under four heads. 1st. The 
 quantity of food that should be taken. 2d. Il8 quality. 
 3d. The maimer in which it should be taken. 4th. The con- 
 dilion of the system when food is taken. 
 
 161. The QUANTITY of food necessary for the system varies. 
 Although many things may aid us in determining the quantity 
 of food proper for an individual, yet there is no certain guide 
 in all cases. Age, occupation, habits, temperament, tempera- 
 ture, nealth, and disease, all exert an influence. 
 
 162. The. child and youth require food to promote the 
 groicth of the bones, muscles, and the different parts of the 
 body. The more ra})id the growth of the child, the greater the 
 demand for food. This accounts for the keen appetite and 
 vigorous digestion in childhood. 
 
 163. Food is necessary to repair the waste which attends 
 the functions of the different organs. The waste is greatest 
 when we exercise most. For this reason, when we increase 
 our exercise or labor, the quantity of food may be increased ; 
 while, on the other hand, when we change from an active em- 
 
 160 — 186. Give the hyyiene of the digestive organs. 160. What does the 
 perfection of the digestive process require ? 161. Can the quantity of 
 food proper for an individual be determined in all cases ? What exert an 
 Influence on the quantity necessary for the body ? 162. At what age is the 
 appetite keen and the digestion vigorous ? Why ? 163. Give another db- 
 mand for food. When is the waste greatest ? When should the amount 
 of food be lessened ? 
 
HYGIENE OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGAXS. 67 
 
 ployment to one less active in character, the food should be 
 diminished in nearly the same degree that the exercise is 
 lessened. 
 
 164. When the girl leaves the active household employ- 
 ments for the shop of the dress-maker, — when the boy leaves 
 the farm for the school-room, — the amount of food should 
 be diminished as soon as the sedentary employment is com- 
 menced ; for, under such circumstances, the appetite will n(»t 
 guide correctly. 
 
 Ohservation. It is a common observation, that in academies 
 and colleges, the older students from the country, who have 
 been accustomed to hard manual labor, sufTcr more frequently 
 from defective digestion and impaired health than the youngci 
 and feebler students from the larger towns or cities. 
 
 165. The food aids in supporting the icarmth of the body. 
 This is the reason why the apjsetite for food is keener in the 
 winter than in the summer. It follows, then, that the system 
 requires more food in cold than in hot weather. 
 
 Observations. 1st. Well-clothed children require less food 
 in cold weather than those thinly dressed. 2d. Flocks and 
 herds that are sheltered in winter, will eat ont, third less than if 
 exposed to the inclemency of the weather; hence it is true 
 economy to keep the infeiior animals warm, as well as children. 
 
 166. In all instances^ the quantity of food should have 
 reference to the present condition of the digestive organs. 
 If they are weakened or diseased, so that but a small quantity 
 of food can be properly digested or changed, that amount only 
 should be taken. Food does not invigonite the system, except 
 it is changed, as has been described in Chap. XI. 
 
 167. The QUALITY of the food best adapted to the wants of 
 
 164. When will not the appetite guide correctly ? What observation re- 
 specting tliosc students that have been accustomed to hard manual laboi / 
 16.5. AVhy is the appetite for food keener in the winter than in the sumnici * 
 Give observation 1st. Observation 2d. 166. Why should the present 
 condition of the digestive organs be regarded in reference to the quantity 
 ot food? 167. On what does the quality of food adapted to the wmts of 
 the system depend '. 
 
58 aNATOMy, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 the syf»tein depends upon the season, climate, age, «S«j., of 
 a person. Like the quantity necessary for an individual, there 
 can be no fixed law. 
 
 168. The kind of food lohich is eaten should be adapted to 
 the distensible character of the stomach and alimentary canal. 
 Hence the food should contain nutritious and innutritious mat- 
 ter — nutritious, to promote the growth and repair the waste of 
 the system ; and innutritious, to distend both the stomach and 
 alimentary canal. Consequently, hot flour bread, rich pies, and 
 jellies, are not so good articles for food, as the unbolted wheat 
 bread, ripe fruits, and berries. 
 
 169. The infuence of season and climate shcvld be consid- 
 ered in selecting food. Food of a highly stimulating character 
 may he used almost with impunity, during the cold weather of 
 a cold climate, but in the warm season, and in a warm climate, 
 it would be very injurious. Animal food, being more stimu- 
 lating than vegetable, can be eaten in the winter; but vegetable 
 food should be used more freely in the spring and summer. 
 
 Observation. By abstaining from meats and stimulating 
 drinks in warm weather, and living on nutritious, unstimulating 
 food, the "season" or bowel complaints may be, in a great 
 degree, prevented. 
 
 170. The age of persons modifes the injlucnce of food on the 
 system. The organs of a child are more sensitive and excita' 
 ble than those of a person advanced in years. Therefore 
 a vegetable_diet would be most appropriate for a child, while 
 stimulating animal food might be conducive to the health of an 
 aged person. 
 
 171. The MANNER in which food should be taken is of much 
 practical importance ; upon it the health of the digestive 
 organs depends. 
 
 168. What should all substances used for food contain? Why? 
 169. Should the season of the year influence us in selecting food ? Give 
 observation. 170. What kind of food is adapted to the organs of the child ? 
 Why ? What kind to a person advanced in life ? Why ? 171 What ia 
 rfurt of ths manner of taking food ? 
 
HYGIENE OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 69 
 
 172. Food should he taken at regular periods. The interval 
 between meals should be regulated by the kind of food, the 
 age, health, exercise, and habits of the individual. Children re- 
 quire food more frequently than adults ; yet, strict regularity and 
 i/unctuality should be observed in regard to their cimes of eaung. 
 
 173. Food should not be taken too frequently. If food is 
 taken before the stomach has regained its tone and energy by 
 repose, or before the digestion of the preceding meal has been 
 completed, not only will the action of the stomach be imperfect, 
 but the food partially digested becomes mixed with that last taken, 
 inducing irritation or disease. In general, an adult should allow 
 six hours to intervene between meals. 
 
 174. Food should be well masticated^ or chewed. All solid 
 food should be reduced to a state of comparative fineness, by the 
 teeth, before it is swallowed ; the gastric fluid of the stomach 
 will then blend with it more readily, and act more vigorously 
 m reducing it to chyme. 
 
 175. Mastication should be moderate^ not rapid ; for the 
 salivary gland% are excited to action in chewing, and some time 
 must elapse before they can secrete saliva in sufficient quantities 
 to moisten the food. 
 
 176. Food should be masticated and swallowed without 
 drink. As the salivary glands supply fluid to moisten the dry 
 food, the use of tea, coflee, water, or any other fluid, is not 
 demanded by nature's laws while taking a meal. 
 
 Observation. Were it customary not to place drinks on the 
 tiible until the solid food is eaten, the evil arising from drinking 
 too much at meals would be obviated. 
 
 177. The CONDITION of the system should be regarded 
 when food is taken. 
 
 172. How should food be taken ? How shoiild the intervals between 
 meals be regulated ? What should be observed in giving food to children ? 
 173. What is the effect if food is taken too freciuently ? 174. Why should 
 food be well masticated i" 17o. Why should we i:ot oat rapidly ? 176. Why 
 do we not require drink while chewing our f )od ? 177. Should the con- 
 dition of the system be regarded when food is taken ? 
 
60 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGr, AND HYGIENE 
 
 178. Food should not be taken immediately after severe exer- 
 tioiiy either of the body or mind ; for all ori^aiis in action require 
 and receive more blood and nervous fluid, than when at rest. 
 
 Observation. Tije practice of students and accountants 
 going inuneiliately from severe mental labor to their meals, is 
 a pernicious one, and a fruitful cause of indigestion and mental 
 debility. The custom of farmers and mechanics hurrying 
 from their toil to the dinner-table, "to save time," — which, to 
 say the least, is poor economy, — does much to cause dyspepsia 
 among these classes in community. 
 
 179. Severe mental or physical labor should not be entered 
 upon immediately after eating. The amount of blood and 
 nervous fluid supplied to the stomach and alimentary cana! 
 during the digestion of food is increased, and a deficiency con- 
 sequently exists in other organs. If the blood is diverted from 
 the stomach to the limbs or brain by active exertion, it will not 
 only cause disease of the digestive organs, but chyle will not be 
 formed, to nourish the system. 
 
 ISO. Pure air is necessary to give a keen appetite and vigor- 
 ous digestion. The digestive organs not only need the stimulus 
 of blood, but they absolutely need the influence of pure blood, 
 which cannot exist in the system, except when we breathe 
 pure air. 
 
 Illustration. A manufacturer stated before a committee of 
 Ihe British parliament, that he removed an arrangement for 
 ventilating his mill, because he noticed that his men ate much 
 more after his mill was ventilated than previous to admitting 
 fresh air into the rooms. The apology for removing the venti- 
 lators was, that he could not afford to have them breathe 
 pure air. 
 
 178. Why should not food be taken after severe exertion ? AVhat is one 
 cause of indigestion among students and accountants ? What is said of 
 farmers and mechanics hurrying from their toil to the dinner-table ? 
 
 179. Why should not severe exertion be made immediately after eatint{ ? 
 
 180. Wtat effect has pure air on digestion ? Give illustration. 
 
HYGIENE OF THE DIGESTIVE ORGANS. 61 
 
 181. Persons should abstain from eatings at least three 
 hours before retiring for sleep. It is no unusual occurrenco 
 for those persons wlio liave eaten heartily irnmcchately before 
 retiring for sleep, to have unpleasant dreams, or to be aroused 
 from their unquiet slumber by colic pains. 
 
 Illustration. A healthy farmer, who was in the habit of 
 eating one fourth of a mince pie immediately before going to 
 bed, became annoyed with unpleasant dreams, and, among the 
 varied images of his fancy, he saw that of his deceased father 
 Becoming alarmed, he consulted a physician, who, after a 
 patient hearing of the case, gravely advised him to eat halfoCa 
 mince pie, assuring him that he would then see his grandfather. 
 
 182. When the eeneral system and digestive organs are 
 mfeebledt mild^ unstimulating food^ in small quantities, should 
 be given. In the instance of a shipwrecked and famished 
 mariner, or a patient recovering from disease, but a small 
 quantity of nourishment should be given at a time. 
 
 183. Water and most fluids are removed from the stomach 
 in a very few mmutes, by the action of the veins. In instances 
 of great feebleness, the body can be strengthened sooner by 
 liquid than by solid food. 
 
 184. When travelling in coaches or cars, the stomach is not 
 m a- state to digest large quantities of food. When food is 
 taken, it should be of the mildest character, and small in 
 quantity. 
 
 185. To prevent disease, it is as necessary that the alimen- 
 tary canal be evacuated regularly, as that we take fcod hito 
 the stomach at regular periods. 
 
 186. Sitting, standing, and walking erect, aid in keeping the 
 digestive organs healthy. 
 
 181. What is the cflcct of eating immediately before retiring for sleep ? 
 Haw is this illustrated in the case of a healthy farmer ? 182. IIow should 
 food be given when both the digestive organs and general system are en- 
 feebled ? 183. A\1iich are introduced into the system soonest, fluids or 
 solid food ? 184. What is said in regard to food while we are travelling ? 
 ).86 Wh»t positioB of the body aids digestion ? 
 
 6 
 
W ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 
 
 187. The blood is distributed lo every part of the systeni. 
 riicre is no part so minute, that it does not receive this circu- 
 lating fluid. This distribution is effected by the agency of the 
 Heart, Ar'te-ries, Veins, and Cap'il-la-ries. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 
 
 188. The HEART is situated in the chest, between the lungs. 
 (Fig. 53.) It is a double organ, or has two sides, called right 
 and left, which are separated by a muscular sep'tum, or 
 partition. 
 
 189. Each side of the heart has two cavities. The upper 
 cavity is called the au'ri-cle, (deaf ear.) The lower cavity is 
 called the ven'tri-cle. These cavities are separated from each 
 other by folds of membrane, called valves. (Fig. 38.) 
 
 190. Between the auricle and ventricle of the right side of 
 the heart, there are three valves, called tri-ciis'pid. Between 
 the auricle and ventricle of the left side of the heart, there are 
 two valves, called mi'tral. 
 
 Observation. To obtain a clear idea of the heart and its 
 valves, it is recommended to examine this part of an ox or 
 calf. In order that each ventricle be opened without muti- 
 
 187. "What is said of the distribution of the blood ? How is it effected ? 
 188—196. Give the anatomy of the circulatcry organs. 188. Describe the 
 heart. 189. How many cavities has it ? What is the upper cavity called ? 
 What is the lower cavity called ? How are these cavities separated ? 
 190. How many valves between the right auricle and ventricle, and what are 
 they called ? How many valves between the left auricle and ventricle, and 
 «hat are they called t How can an idea of the heart be obtained i 
 
ANATOMY OF THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 
 
 63 
 
 latlng the parts that compose its internal structure, out on each 
 side of the septum parallel to it. This may be easily found 
 between the ventricles, as they diirer in thickness. 
 
 191. The ARTERIES are the vessels that carry the blood fronj 
 the heart. The right ventricle of the heart gives rise to the 
 ful'mo-na-ry artery ; the left ventricle to a large artery, called 
 the a-ort'a. At the lommencemont of both of these vessels 
 are valves, and from their shape, they are called sevi-i-lu'nar 
 
 Fig. 38. 
 
 Fig 38. I, The descending vein. 2, The ascending vein. 3, Tho right niiricle 
 4 The opening between the ritiht auricle and the riglit ventricle. 5, The right ven 
 tixle. 6, The tricuspid val"es. 7, The pulmonary artery. 8, 8, The branches o? 
 the ptilinonary artery that pass to the right and left lung. 9, The semihinar valves of 
 ti.e pulmonary artery. 10, The division between the two ventricles of the heart, 
 li, 11, The pulmonary veins. 12, The left auricle. 13, The opening between tJio 
 lei auricle and ventricle. 14, The left ventricle. 15, The mitral valves. 16, IC, The 
 aorta. 17, The semilunar valves of the aorta. 
 
 Observotion. The parts of the circulatory organs most liable 
 to disease are the valves of the heart, particularly the mitral. 
 
 T91. What are arteries ? Where does the puhnonary artery take ita 
 ri«^ ? The aort? ? What valves ut the commencement of these vessels ? 
 IVscribe fig. 38. What parts of the circulatory organs are most liable tc 
 dtv«a8e? 
 
T 
 
 ■^ *^ 
 
 ^' 
 
 4' 
 
 ■f '■ 
 
 / 
 
 64 
 
 ANATOMY, irHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 V^'Tien tMese mcmbmnous folds become ossified or rupti'.rea 
 ihe blood regurgitates, and causes great distress in breathing. 
 
 192. The PULMONARY ARTERY conimcnccs in front of the 
 aorta. It ascends obliquely to the under surface of ihe arch of 
 (he aorta, where it divicJcs into two branches, one of which 
 passes to the right, the other to tiic left lung. This artery 
 conveys the dark-colored or "venous" blood to the lungs, and, 
 with its corresponding veins, establishes the pulmonic circU' 
 lalion. 
 
 Fig. 39. 
 
 Fig. 39. t, The windpipe, h, The heart, d, The aorta, p. The pulmonary 
 aiiery. 1, Tne biancli of the pulmonary artery that divides in the left lung. 2, The 
 Dranch that divides in tlie right luni?. 
 
 Tlie divisions of this artery continue to divide and subdivide, until they become no 
 larger than hairs in si/.c. Tlie^^e minute vessels pass over the air-cells, represented by 
 ■mall dark points around the margin of tlie lungs. 
 
 192. Describe the pulmonary artery. "WTiat is the function of this 
 artery ? Explain fig. 39. What is said of the divisions of the pulmon»r.» 
 trtery? 
 
ANATOMY OF THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 
 
 QS» 
 
 193. The AORTA proceeds from the left ventricle of the 
 
 heart and contains the pure or "arterial" blood. This vessoi 
 
 gives off branches, which divide and subdivide as they advance 
 
 until they are distributed to every part of the body. Thia 
 
 artery, with its corresponding veins, establishes the systemic 
 
 circulation 
 
 Fig. 40 
 
 Fig 40. The aorta and its branches, a, The commencement of the sottk. 
 193. Describe the aorta. What is represented by fig. 40 ? 
 
 6* 
 
66 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 1J4. Tha VEINS are the vessels which return the blood to 
 the auricles of the heart, after it has been circulated by the 
 arteries through the lungs and other parts of ihe body. A 
 certain inter>'als, they are furnished with valves, which allow 
 the blood to flow toward the heart only. In general, they arc 
 nearer the surface of the body than the arteries. 
 
 195. The CAPILLARIES constitute a microscopic net-work, 
 and are so distributed through every part of the body as to ren- 
 der it impossible to introduce the smallest needle beneath the 
 skin .vithout wounding several of these fine vessels. They 
 establish the communication between the termination of the 
 arteries and the beginning of the veins. 
 
 196. The relation of the capillaries to the arteries and 
 veins, is illustrated by figs. 41 and 42. 
 
 Fig. 41. 
 
 Fig. 41. An ideal view of a p<.rtion of the pulmonic circulation. 1, 1, A branch 
 •f the drtery that carries the impure blood to the lungs 3, 3, Capillary vessels 
 t, 2, A vein through which the red blood is returned to the left side of the heart 
 
 Fig. 42. An Ideal view of a portion of the systemic circulation 1, i, A branch 
 •f the aorta. This terminates in the capillaries 3, 3. 2, 2, A vein through which 
 the Impure blond is carried to the right side of the heart. 
 
 194 What are veins ? With what are they furnished ? 195. What do 
 the Cftpillaries constitute ? What do they establish ? What does fig. 41 
 represent? Fig. 42? 
 
PRI&IOLOOY or THE CIRCULATORY OROANS. 67 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE CIRCULATORY GROANS. 
 
 197. The walls of all the cavities of the heart are composed 
 of muscular fibres, which are endowed with the property of con- 
 tracting and relaxing, like other parts of the muscular system 
 The contraction and relaxation of the muscular fibres of the 
 heart increase and diminish the size of its ca/ities. 
 
 198. The two auricles dilate at the same instant, and also 
 contract at the same instant. The two ventricles cdhtract, while 
 the auricles dilate. Thus the blood is forced from the heart to 
 every part of the body, and received again on its return. 
 
 199. The roTirse of the blood through the heart, arteries, 
 and veins, may be easily comprehended by attention to fig. 43, 
 which gives an ideal view of the circulation of the blood. 
 
 209. The heart aids iu forcing the blood through the arte- 
 ries, to the different parts of the body. Every time the heart 
 contracts, there is a " pulse," or " pulsation," in the arteries. 
 
 Experiment. Apply the fingers upon the artery at the wrist, 
 at two different points, about two inches apart ; if the pressure 
 be moderately made, the "pulse" will be felt at both points. 
 Let the upper point be pressed firmly, and there will be no 
 pulsation at the lower point; but make strong pressure upon 
 the lower point only, and the pulsation will continue at the 
 upper point; proving that the blood flows from the heart, in 
 the arteries, to different parts of the system, 
 
 197—203. Give the physiology of the circulatory organs. 197 What do 
 the contraction and relaxation of the muscular walls of the heart produce ? 
 19^ What is said of the contraction and dilatation of the auricles ? Of 
 the ventricles ? 200. What causes the " pulse," or •' pulsation," in the 
 arterien ? How is it proved that the blood flows from the heart in thb 
 sxteries ? 
 
68 ANATOiMY, PHYSlOLOUy, AND IIYaiENB. 
 
 201. The frequency of the pulse varies according to tht 
 age, sex, and degree of health. In adults, it is usually from 
 seventy to seventy-five "beats" in a minute. 
 
 202. There is no pulsation in the veins, and the return of 
 the blood to the heart through them can be shown by the fol- 
 lowing experiments. 
 
 Experiments 1st. Press firmly on one of the veins upon 
 the back of the hand, carrying the pressure toward the 
 fingers ; for a moment the vein will disappear. On removing 
 the pressure of the finger, it will reappear, from the blood 
 rushing in from below. 
 
 2d. If a tape be tied around the arm above the elbow, the 
 veins below will become larger and more prominent, and also a 
 greater nunflber will be brought in view. At this time, apj.Iy 
 the finger at the wrist, and the pulsation of the arteries still 
 continues, showing that ihe blood is constantly flowing from 
 the heart, through the arteries, into the veins ; and the increased 
 size of the veins shows that the pressure of the tape prevents 
 its flowing back to the heart. 
 
 203. From the right ventricle of the heart, (2, fig. 43?) the 
 dark, impure blood is forced into the pulmonary artery, (3 ;) 
 and its branches (4, 5) carry the blood to the left and right 
 lung. In the capillary vessels (6, 6) of the lungs fixe blood 
 becomes pure, or of a red color, and is returned to t' left auri- 
 cle of the heart, (9,) by the veins, (7, 8.) From the left auri- 
 cle the pure blood passes into the left ventricle, (10.) By a 
 forcible contraction of the left ventricle of the heait, the blood 
 is thrown into the aorta, (11.) Its branches (12, IS, 13) carry 
 the pure blood to every organ, or part of the body. The 
 divisions and sjbdivisions of the aorta terminate in capillary 
 vessels, represented by 14, 14. In these hair-like vessels 
 the blood becomes dark-colored, and is returned to the right 
 auricle of the heart, (1,) by the ve'na ca'va de-scen' dens (15) 
 and ve'na cava as-cen'dens^ ( 16.) The tricuspid valves ( 17) pre- 
 vent the reflow of the blood from the right ventricle to the righi 
 
 201. What varies the frequency of the pulse ? 202. Is there pulsation 
 in the veins ? How is it proved, by experiment 1st, that the blood is 
 returned to the heart by the veins ? By experiment 2d ? 
 
PHYSIOLOGY OF THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 
 
 69 
 
 auricle. The semilunar valves ( 18) prevent the blood passing 
 from the pulmonary artery to the right ventricle. The mitral 
 valves (19) prevent the flow of blood from the left ventricle to 
 the left auricle. The semilunar valves (20) prevent thr ^eflow 
 of blt)od from the aona to the left ventricle. 
 
 Fig. 43. 
 
 Noti^ From fig. 43. give the course of the blood thiuugh th» heart, arte 
 •^s, and veins, or from anatomical outline plates 6 and 7. 
 
70 ANATOMY, FHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIEME. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 
 
 204. The clothing should he loosely worn. To have good 
 nealth^ the blood must circulate freely. Consequently, no arti- 
 cle of apparel should be worn so as to prevent a free flow of 
 blood through every organ of the body. 
 
 205. Strings, bands, or belts, however narrow, should not 
 be worn so tightly as to cause an indentation of the skin of the 
 trunk, or extremities. 
 
 Observations. 1st. Inelastic bands, worn upon the lower 
 extremities, are a frequent cause of enlarged veins and painful 
 limbs. 2d. The fulness and the crimson tint of the face, gid- 
 diness, fainting, and many derangements in the functions of 
 differei-t organs, are produced by pressure upon the blood- 
 ves.=els of the trunk. 
 
 206. The skin should be kept clean, and every part of an 
 equal teinperature. These conditions favor free and vigorous 
 circulation. 
 
 Observation. When intending to ride in a cold day, wash 
 Uie face, hands, and feet, in cold water, and rub them smartly 
 with a coarse towel. This is far better than to take spirits into 
 the stomach, to keep the extremities warm. 
 
 207. Muscular exercise is important in maintaining a 
 
 204 — 214. Give the hygiene of the circulatory organs. 204. Why should 
 the clothing be loosely worn ? 205. What is said of bands or belts ? What 
 is the effect of wearing inelastic bands upon the lower extremities ? What 
 is a frequent cause of giddiness, faintness, and derangement of the func- 
 tions of many organs ? 206. In what condition should the skin be kept? 
 Give observation. 207. What is the effect of muscular exercise apon the 
 circulatiou uf bluod ? 
 
HYGIENE OF TH.S CIRCULATORY ORGANS 71 
 
 nealthj circulation. The muscles, when used, force the 
 blood more rapidly to and from the heart. 
 
 Illustration. The coach-driver and teamster throw their 
 arms around their bodies to warm them, when cold ; because 
 the muscles that are called into action in swingii. g the arms, 
 force a greater quantity of blood into the chilled parts, and 
 n\ore heat is produced. 
 
 208. Idle men and women, who complain of cold feet, and 
 take " warming bitters " to quicken the blood, would find them- 
 selves warmer and more invigorated by culling the muscles into 
 action in the mechanic's shop, or the kitchen, or in some active 
 employment. 
 
 Observation. In cold weather, when travelling in cars, the 
 feet will not become chilled so readily when standing as when 
 sitting. Again, the feet will be warmer by allowing them to 
 swing, instead of being supported the whole time, because tiie 
 muscles, called into action in swinging them, increase the cir- 
 culation of the blood. 
 
 209. The quality and quantity of the blood modify the action 
 of the heart and blood-vessels. If this fluid is abundant and 
 pure, the circulatory vessels act with more energy than when 
 it is deficient in quantity or defective in quality. 
 
 Illustrations. 1st. In an athletic man, whose heart beats 
 forcibly, and whose pulse is strong, if a considerable quantity of 
 blood is drawn from a vein, as in bleeding, the heart will beat 
 feebly, and the pulse will become weak. 
 
 2d. When the blood is made impure by inhaling vitiated air, 
 the action of the heart and arteries is diminished, which pro- 
 duces an effect similar to that which takes piace when blood ia 
 drawn from a vein. 
 
 210. When large blood-vessels are wounded or cut, the 
 
 Give illustration. 208. What is better for cold feet and hands than 
 ♦ warming bitters " ? Give observation 209. What effect have the quantity 
 and quality of the blood upon the circulatory vessels ? Give illustration 
 1st. Illustration 2d. 210. What is necessary when large blood-vesseU aie 
 wounded or cut ? 
 
72 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 flow of blood must be immediately stopped, or the person 
 will soon die. If a large artery is wounded, the blood will be 
 thrown out in jets, or jerks, every time the pulse beats. The 
 flow of blood can be stopped until a surgeon arrives, *>4ther by 
 comp/esining the vessel between the wound and the heart, or by 
 compressing the end of the divided artery in the wound. 
 
 Fig. 46. 
 
 Fig. 44. The track of the large artery of the ann 1, The collar-bone. 9, 10, The 
 •arge artery of the arm. 
 
 Fig. 45. B, Tlie manner of compressing tlie artery near the collar-bone. A, The 
 manner of compressing the large artery of the arm, with the fingers. C, Th3 manner 
 of compressing the divided extremity of an artery in the wound, with a finger. 
 
 21 1. After making compression with the fingers, as described 
 and illustrated, take a piece of cloth or handkerchief, twist it 
 cornerwise, and tie a hard knot midway between the two ends. 
 
 "What is shown by fig. 44 ? By fig. 45 ? 211. What is to be done after 
 comp'^essing the wound, as before described ? 
 
HYGIENE OF THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 
 
 78 
 
 riiis knot should be placed over the artery, between the wound 
 and the heart, and the ends carried around the Hmb and loosely 
 tied. A stick, five or six inches long, should bo placed under 
 the handkerchief, which should be twisted until the knot has 
 made sufficient compression on the artery to allow the removal 
 of the fingers without a return of bleeding. Continue the 
 compression until a surgeon can be culled. 
 
 Fig. 4G 
 
 Fi-'. 47. 
 
 Fig. 4C. Tlie nietliod of applying tlie knotted Imndkerchiff to make cotnpreastou oa 
 ihia filter)'. A, IJ, Tliu track of the larpe artery of the arm. 
 
 TiS. 47. A, C, The track of the lar^ic artery of tlie thigh. 15, The method of ap 
 ()lyiii^ the kiuittcd handkerchief to conipre.ss thiM artery. 
 
 Observation. When an artery of the arm is cut, elevalitig 
 the wounded limb above the head will tend to an t the ilcv of 
 blood. In a wound of a lower limb, raise the fooi, so 'lat it 
 shall be higher than the hip, until the bleeding ceases. 
 
 Illustration. On one occasion, the distiti<j;uished Dr. Natliaa 
 Smith was called to a person who had divided one of 'he large 
 arteries below the knee. After trying in vain to find the I)leed- 
 ing vessel, so as to secure it, he caused the foot to be elevatd 
 
 What is shown by figs. 46, 47 ? Give observation. Relate a simple 
 (Operation by Dr. Nath.<n Smith. 
 
 7 
 
74 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE 
 
 hiaher than the hip. At the first instant, the blood was forced 
 from the wound about twelve inches; in a minute, it was dimin- 
 ished to three or four ; and, in a short time, the bleeding ceased. 
 This Dr. S. called his '•*■ great '''* operation; and it was truly 
 great in simplicity and science. 
 
 212. In " flesh wounds," when no large blood-vessel ja 
 divided, wash the part with cold water, and, when bleeding 
 has ceased, draw the wound together, and retain it with narrow 
 strips of adhesive plaster. These should be put on smoothly, 
 and a sufficient number applied to cover the wound. In most 
 : .ances of domestic practice, the strips of adhesive plaster are 
 too wide. They should not exceed in width one fourth of an 
 inch. Then apply a loose bandage, and avoid all '' iiealmg 
 salves," ointments, and washes. 
 
 Fig. 48. 
 
 Fig. 48. The manner in which strips of adhesive plaster are applied to wou.ids. 
 
 213. The union of the divided parts is elfected by the actioi; 
 of the divided blood-vessels, and not by salves and ointments. 
 The only object of the dressing is to keep the parts together, 
 rnd protect the wound from air and impurities. Nature^ in alt 
 cases of wounds, performs h^r own cure. Such simple incisions 
 do not generally require a second dressing, and should not be 
 opened till the parts are healed. In removing the dressing 
 from a wound, both ends of the strips of plaster should be 
 raised and drawn toward the incision. The liability of the 
 wound re-opening is thus? diminished. 
 
 212. How should *' flesh wounds " be dressed ? 213. How is the union of 
 the divided parts eifected ? AVTiat should be avoided ? Uow should tlw 
 strips of plaster be r<^moved from a wound ? 
 
WYGIENE CF THE CIRCULATORY ORGANS. 75 
 
 214. Tne proper position of the limbs favors the unicn of 
 wounds. If the wound be upon the front part of the leg, 
 between the knee and ankle, extending the knee and bending 
 the ankle will aid its closing. If the wound be upon the back 
 part of the leg, by extending the foot and bending the knee, 
 the gaping of the wound will be diminished. When woimds 
 occur upon tlie trunk, let the position of the person be regarded 
 
 Pig. 4a a, A, Wounds on the back part of the ami and fore-arm. ft, ft, Wounds 
 on the front part of the arm and fore-arm. By bending the elbow and wrist, tho 
 wounds at a, a, are opened, while the wounds at ft, ft, are closed. Were the arm ex 
 tended at the elbow and wrist, the wounds at a, a, would be closed, and those at ft, I 
 would be opened. 
 
 21^. In wounds made by pointed instruments, as a nail, or 
 in lacerated wounds, as those made by forcing a blunt instrj- 
 ment, as a hook, into the soft parts, there will be no dnect and 
 immediate union. In these cases, apply a soothing poultice, as 
 one made of linseed meal, and also keep the limb still. It is 
 judicious to consult a physician immediately, in punctured or 
 lacerated wounds, beciuse they often induce the most danger- 
 ous diseases. 
 
 214. Does the proper position of the limbs favor the union of wounds? 
 216. How should puncture 1 and lacerated wounds be dressed ? 
 
*B ANATOMY PHYSIOLOGY, AND I^YOIENB 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 ABSORPTION. 
 
 216. Absorption is the process by which the nutrient por- 
 lion of the food is removed from the alimentary canal to bo 
 conveyed into the circulatory vessels. It is likewise the process 
 by which the particles of matter that have become injurious or 
 useless, are removed from the mass of fluids and solids of 
 which the body is composed. These renovaimg and remov- 
 ing processes are performed by two sets of vessels. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE LYMPHATIC VESSELS. 
 
 217. The vessels that act exclusively for the growth and 
 renovation of the system, are found only in the alimentary 
 C'nal. They are called lac'te-als* 
 
 218. The vessels whose sole function is to remove paniclea 
 of matter already deposited, are called lym-phat'ics. The 
 radicals, or commencement of the veins, in many, and it may 
 be in all parts of the body, perform the office of absorption 
 
 Fig. 50. A reiiresentation of tlie lymphatic vessels and glands. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, The 
 lymphatic vcHstls and glands of the lower limbs. 7, Lymphatic glands. 8, The 
 connnencement of the thoracic duct. 9, The lymphatics of the kidney. 10, Of the 
 stomach. 11, Of the liver. 12, 12, The lungs. 13, 14, 15, The lymphatics and 
 glands of the arm. 16, 17, 18, Of the face and neck. 19,20, Large veins. 21, The 
 thoracic duct. 26, The lymphatics of the heart. 
 
 * See paragraph 142. 
 
 216. What is absorption ? 217. What are those vessels called that act 
 exclusively for the growth and renovation of the body ? 218 — 221. Give 
 the anatomy of the lymphatic vessels. 218. Name those vessels that remove 
 the atoms already deposited. What other vessels perform the office of 
 absorption ? What does fig. uO represent ? 
 
ANATOMY OP THE LYMPHATIC VESSELS. 
 
 77 
 
 Fig. 60. 
 
 7 • 
 
78 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND ITYGIKNK 
 
 219. The LYMPHATIC vessels are very minute at their com 
 mencem^nt ; so much so, that they cannot be seen withou 
 the aid of a magnifying glass. As they proceed, they unite 
 and form larger trunks, that open into tlie veins. 
 
 220. Lymphatic vessels are found in every part of the 
 body, except the brain, yet, it is supposed they exist in this or- 
 gan. The knotted appearance of these vessels is owing to 
 llie arrangement of their internal coats, to form valves. 
 
 22 J. In certain parts of the body, us the neck, these ves- 
 sels pass through small, soft bodies, called lymphatic glands^ 
 which are to these vessels what the mesenteric glands are to 
 tne lacteals. 
 
 Observation. Sometimes, when we are afflicted with a 
 o^ld, these glands in the neck enlarge ; they are usually 
 called " kernels." 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE LYMPHATIC VESSELS. 
 
 222. Though the lacteals and lymphatics resemble each 
 otlicr in their structure and termination, yet they differ as to the 
 nature of the fluids which they convey, as well as the nature ot 
 their functions. The lacteals open into the small intestine, 
 and possess the power of rejecting all substances in the passing 
 food but the chyle. 
 
 223. The lymphatics, on the contrary, not only imbibe, or 
 suck up, all the various constituents of the body, both fluid and 
 Bolid, when their vitality has ceased, but they absorb foreign 
 and extraneous substances when presented to their mouths. 
 
 Observations. 1st. When little or no food is taken into the 
 stomach, life is supported by the lymphatic vessels imbibing 
 
 219. Describe the lymphatic vessels. 220. Where are they found ? To 
 what is tne knotted appoarance of these vessels owing ? 222 — 224 Give 
 the iisr of the lyviphatic vessels. 221. What are lymphatic glands? Give 
 observation. 222. What is said of the lacteals and lymphatics ? Give 
 the function of the former. 223. Give the use of the lymphatics. IIow 
 ta life suppot 'ed when little or no food is eaten ? 
 
nTOIENE OF THE LYMrilATIC VESSKI.S. 79 
 
 iho fat, and roconvoying it into the circnl.ifory vc«?so1s. It is 
 the removal of this substance which causes the emficiation of 
 the face and limbs of o person recovering from a f«'ver. In 
 consumption, the txlreme attenuation of tlie l!mbs is caused by 
 the absorption, not only of tlio fat, but also of the muscles anU 
 more solid parts of the body. 
 
 2d. Animals which live in a half torpid state during tho 
 winter, derive their nourishment from the same source. In 
 other words, we may say the starving animal lives for a time 
 upon itself, eating up, by internal absorption, such parts of tho 
 body as can be spared, under urgent necessity, to feed these 
 organs, and continue those functions tliat are absolutely essen- 
 tial to life. 
 
 224. The most important absorbing surfaces are the 
 stomach, intestines, lungs, and skin. Through the lungs, 
 absorption is not onlv very great, but extremely rapid. 
 
 Illustration. In inhaling sulphuric ether, or letheon, it is 
 introduced into the vessels of the lungs in the form of vapor, 
 and through them it is rapidly conveyed to the brain, and thus 
 influences the nervous system. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE LYMPHATIC VESSELS. 
 
 225. By the action of the lymphatics, substances of an inju- 
 rious, as well as of a beneficial character may be conveyed 
 into the system. These vessels, under certain conditions, are 
 more active in their office than at other periods ; and i is of 
 practical utility to know what influences their action. 
 
 228. The function of these vessels is increased by moisture^ 
 
 "WTiat causes the extreme atte.mation of the limbs in consumption ? How 
 do those animals derive their nourishment that live in a half torpid stf te 
 during winter ? 224. What are the most important absorbing surface ; ? 
 How is letheon introduced into the system ? 225 — 229. Give the hygie^ie 
 of the lymphatic vessels. 225. What is said respecting the action of the 
 lymphatic ressels ? 226. What influences the function of tliese vessels ? 
 
80 ANATOMY, rnVSlOLOGV, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 arid lessened hy an ^active state of the lacteah. Obser 
 vation shows that the ill-fcul, and those persons that live in 
 marshy districts, contract contagious diseases more readily than 
 those individuals who are well fed, and breathe a dry and 
 pure air. 
 
 227. The "(kin and the apparel of nurses and watchers 
 should he (Iran, and as free of perspiration as possible. The air 
 of the sick-room should ^so be dry. The observan e of these 
 conditions tends to prevent the absorption of the poisonous 
 matter of contagious diseases, as small-pox, measles, &c. 
 
 Observation. When we have been visiting, or aaending on 
 a sick person, it is judicious to change the apparel worn in the 
 sick-room, and also give the skin a thorough bathing. The out- 
 side garments, also, should be aired, as poisonous matter may 
 have penetrated the meshes of the cloth. 
 
 228. The stomach should he supplied with food of a nutrient 
 and digestible character, in proper quantities, and at stated 
 periods. The chyle formed from the food stimulates the 
 lactcals to activity, which activity is attended with an inactive 
 p'atc of the lymphatics of the skin and lungs. Thus due at- 
 tention should be given to the food of the attendants on the 
 sick, and the children of the family. 
 
 Observation. Many individuals, to prevent contracting dis 
 ease that may be comm\micated from one person to another, 
 use tobacco, either chewed or smoked ; and sometimes alco- 
 liol, with decoctions of bitter herbs. These substances do not 
 diminish, but tend to increase the activity of the lymphatics. 
 Thus they make use of the means by which the poisonou* 
 matter formed in tlie system of the diseased person, may be 
 more readily conveyed into their own. 
 
 What does observation show ? 227. "Why should the skin and apparel 
 of nurses and watchers be as free of perspiration as possible ? What sug- 
 gestion when we have been visiting or attending on the sick ? 228. Why 
 should the stomach oe supplied with food of a nutrient and digestible 
 character ? What is said of the use of alcohol or tobacco, in preventing th« 
 bitroduction of the poisonous matter of contagious diseases ? 
 
BYOIF.NB OF THE LYiMPIIATIC VESSELS. 81 
 
 229. Absorption hy the skin is most vigorous when the ex- 
 ternal layer is removed by vesication^ or blistering. Then, 
 external applications, as ointmtMita, are brought in imncdiate 
 contact with the orifices, or moullis, of the lymphatics of tho 
 skin, and by them rapidly imbibed and circulated through tho 
 ftystom. The same results follow, if iha skin is only j)unctured. 
 
 Observation. 1st. In case of an accidental wound, it is best 
 immediately to bathe the part thoroughly in pjre water, and to 
 avoid all irritating applications. In some instances, it would be 
 well to apply lunar caustic immediately. 
 
 2d. When shrouding dead bodies, or removing the skin 
 from animals that have died of disease, it would be well to 
 lubricate the hands with olive-oil or lard. This aifords pro- 
 tection to the minute portions of the skin from which ilie 
 external layer may be removed. 
 
 3d. In all cases where there is an ulcer, or bore, the p-xrt 
 should be covered with something impervious to fluids, as 
 couri-plaster, before exposing the system to any animal, vege- 
 table, or mineral poison. 
 
 '239 When is absorption by the skin most Tigoroua i Oive obMrvation 
 Ist. Obsenratioa 2d. ObserTation 'M 
 
h 
 
 B2 ANATOMY PIIVSIOLOGY, Ar4D HYGIKNIL 
 
 THAPTER XVII. 
 
 SECRETION. 
 
 230. In tl e human body are found many fluids and solids of 
 dissimilar appearance and character. These are produced by 
 the action of organs called Se'cre-to-ry. Some of these organs 
 are of simp''? structure, wliile oiliers are ve. y coTipIicated in 
 their arrangement. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE SECRETORY ORGANS. 
 
 231. The SECRETORY ORGANS are of three kinds, namely 
 the Ex-ha'fents^ Fol'li-cltn^ and the Glands. 
 
 232. The exhalents are supposed to be terminations of the 
 arteries, or capillaries. They are of two kinds, external and 
 internal. The latter terminate on the surfaces within the body 
 and the former upon the outside. 
 
 Fig. 51. 
 
 Fi^. 51. A secretorv follitie. An artery is seen, which supplies the material for Iti 
 eecretion. Follicles are al3o supplied with veins iind orgouic nerves. 
 
 233. The follicles are small bags, or sacs, in the deeper 
 layer of the skin and mucous membrane. The pores seen on 
 the skin are the outlets of these bodies. 
 
 230. How are thp fli..us and 1 3lids of ♦he 5o(ly .vod'jccd ? 231—234. Give 
 the anatomy of the secretory organs. I.Jl. Name the secretory organs. 
 232 Describe tie exhalents. What does fig. 51 reprer «nt ? 233. Define 
 ]oUicle&, 
 
PHYSIOLOGY OP THE SECRETC RY ORGANS. 83 
 
 234. The glands are the chief agent"? of secretion in the 
 body. They are formed of minute arteries, veins, and tubes, 
 wound together. These organs vary in size from a mustard- 
 seed to th t of the hver, which weighs from two to four pounds. 
 Every gland, however minute, has a small duct for collecting 
 and carrvin.f.' off the secreted fluid. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE SECRETORY ORGANS. 
 
 235. Secretion is one of the most obscure and mysterious 
 functions of the br'dy. It has the same meaning (physiologi- 
 cally) as separati n. Not only is the pro,>.ss by which sul> 
 stanccs are separated from the blood, called secretion^ but th** 
 same term is also applied to substances thus separated. 
 
 Fig. 53. a a, A iecretory gland, b, b, Minute ducU tLki art apitad thrrmgh the 
 ^iniidB. These coalesce to form th« main duct, c 
 
 236. All the fluids of the body arj derived from the blood, 
 and this element, when distributed to the different glands and 
 follicles, is similar in composition and character: but the fluids 
 secreted by them, vary in appearance in a remarkable degree. 
 The office of the glands is principally to form different secro- 
 
 234. Whiit is said of the glands ? Explain fig. 52. 2;i'>— 287. Crive '.he 
 physiology of the ^cretory orgmis. 23.5. What is secretion ? 236. From 
 what are all the fluid.s of the body dei-ved? What is the principal office 
 af the glands ? 
 
84 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND IIVr.IENE. 
 
 tions. Thus the salivary glatids secrete the insipid sahva; the 
 liver, tlie yellow, ropy bile ; and the kidneys, the acrid urine. 
 
 2.'J7. When any substance wliich is not demanded for nutri- 
 tion, or does not give nouriq»ment to the sy tern, is taken up by 
 the lymphatic vesbuls vu<-\ conveyed intD the blood, it is dis- 
 charged by secretions. 
 
 Tl/ustrafion. A few years since, a poor inebriate was carried 
 to a London hospital in a state of intoxication. lie lived but a 
 few hours. On examining his brain, nearly half a gill of fluid, 
 strongly impregnated with gin, was found in the cavities of this 
 organ. This was secreted from the vessels of the brain. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE SECRETORY ORGANS. 
 
 238. Unless the secretions are regularly maintained^ dis- 
 ease will he the ultimate result. Let the secretions from the 
 skin be suppressed, and fever or some internal inflammation 
 will follow. If tliebiie is impeded, digestion will be impaired. 
 If any other secretion is suppressed, it will cause a derange- 
 ment of the various internal organs. 
 
 Ohservation. Ardent spirits derange tiie secretions, and 
 change the structure of the brain. This is one reason why 
 inebriates do not live to advanced age. 
 
 239. The quantity of blood injluences the character of the 
 secretions. If it is lessened to any great extent, the "-icretiona 
 will be lessened, as well as changed in character. 
 
 Illustration. When a person has lost a consider .c quantity 
 of blood, tliere is a sensation of thirst in the throat, attended 
 with a cold, pale, dry skin. WHien iTjaction comes on, the 
 
 237. What becomes of those substances which are taken up by the 
 lymphatics, and do not nourish the body ? How is this illustrated ? 
 238 — 241. Give the /ii/r/ic/w of the secretory organs. 238. What is the effect 
 on the system if the secretions are not regularly maintained ? What ia 
 a reason that inebriates do not live to an advanced age ? 239. "What effect 
 n the secfctions when the quantitj of hlood ia lessened ? How is this 
 illustrated ? 
 
HYUIENE 01 THE SECllGru.l'V uKvJA^S 86 
 
 perspiration is cold, attended with nausea, and sometimes 
 vomiting. 
 
 240. 77ie amount of action modifies the condition of the 
 secretory organs. When a secretory offran is excessively 
 stimulated, its vigor and energy are reduced. The subsequent 
 debility may be so great as to suppress or destroy its functional 
 power. 
 
 Illustrations. 1st. In those sections of the country where flax 
 is spun on a " foot-wheel," the spinners sometimes moisten tho 
 thread with saliva. This seems to operate economically for a 
 lime, but debility of the salivaiy organs soon follows, and they 
 are incapfible of supplying saliva sufficient to moisten the food, 
 producing, in a short time, disease of the digestive organs 
 
 2d. The habit of continual spitting, which attends the chew- 
 ing of tobacoo and gums, induces debility, not only of the 
 salivary glands, but of the system generally. 
 
 241. The secretions are much influenced by mental emo- 
 tions. If we smell savory food, there wili be an increased flow 
 of saliva ; if we hear the intelligence of the death of a cherished 
 friend, the tear will quickly coai.se down the cheek. • 
 
 Observation. Such is the nice sympathy which exists be- 
 tween diflerent parts of the body, that in the evenings of the 
 warm season, a chill upon the impressible skin that suppresses* 
 the perspiration, is frequently followed by a diarrhoea, dysen- 
 tery, or cholera morbus. These can be prevented by avoiding 
 the chill. An efficient means of relief, is, immediately to 
 
 restore the skin to its proper action. 
 
 5 
 
 240. What is the effect if a secretory organ is excessively stimulated ? 
 How is this effect illustrated by the use of the saUvary glands ? 241. Door 
 the state of the mind influence the secretions ? What is said of tho sym- 
 pathy between different parts of the body ? 
 
 8 
 
R6 ANATOTiY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 NUTRITION. 
 
 212. The blood is the nutritive fluid of animals. It i's com. 
 posed of two parts — a watery fluid, called se'rum^ and a solift 
 portion, called co-ag'u-Ium, (clot.) 
 
 Observation. That portion of the serum which remains fluid 
 after coagulation by heat has taken place, is called se-ros'i-tt/. 
 It is more abundant in the blood of old, than in that of young 
 animals ; and it forms the " red gravy " in roasted meats. 
 
 243. The blood is not necessarily red. It may be white, as 
 m the fish ; .transparent, as in the insect ; or yellowish, as in 
 the reptile. There is no animal in which the blood is red in all 
 parts of the body. The ligaments and tendons, in man, are not 
 supplied with red, but with white blood. 
 
 244. Nutrition is the vital act by which the different parts 
 of the body renew the materials of which they are composed. 
 Digestion, circulation, absorption, and respiration, are but sepa- 
 rate links in the chain of nutrition, which would be destroyed 
 by the absence of any one of them. 
 
 245. The nutritive process is a kind of secretion, by which 
 particles of matter are separated from the blood, and conveyed 
 with wonderful accuracy to the appropriate textures, or parts 
 of the body. 
 
 246. The function of the nutrient vessels antagonize those 
 of absorption ; while one system is constructing, with beautifu! 
 
 242. What is the nutritive fluid of animals? Of what is it composed? 
 Wliat forms the red gravy in roasted meat ? 213. Wliat is said of the color 
 of the blood? 244 — 248. W/iat remarks respecting nutrition* 244. What 
 ia nutrition ? 24.5. Wliat is said of the nutrit-ve process ? 246. What can 
 you say of the function of the nutrient vessel*. ? 
 
NuiniTioN. 87 
 
 precision, tlie animal frame, the other is diligently employed 
 in pulling down this complicated structure. But amid this 
 simultaneous renovation and decay, the form and beauty of the 
 organs are preserved. 
 
 Ohsenmtion This ever-changing state of the body is shown 
 by giving animals colored matter, mixed with their food, which 
 in a short time tinges their bones with the same color as the 
 matter intrcHuced. Let it be withdrawn, and in a few days 
 the bones will assume their former color — evidently from the 
 eflects of absorption. The changeful state of the body is fur 
 Iher shown, by the losses to which it is subjected ; by the 
 necessity of aliment; by the emaciation which follows absti- 
 nence from food. 
 
 247. The renewal of every part of the body is not perfected 
 merely by the passage of the blood through the arteries of the 
 systemic circulation, but by the smallest capillary vessels, 
 called the nutrient arteries. 
 
 248. " As the blood goes the round of the circulation, the 
 nutrient capillary vessels select and secrete those parts which 
 are similar to the nature of the structure, and the other portions 
 pass on; so that every part takes up and converts to its own 
 use the very principles which it requires for its growth ; or, in 
 other words, as the vital current Uj.pioaches each organ, the 
 particles appropriate to it feel its attractive force, — obey it, — 
 quit the stream, — mingle with the substance of its texture, — 
 and are changed into its own true and proper natuie." 
 
 Illustration. When a bone is broken, or a ner>e wounded, 
 minute vessels shoot out from the living parts, and immediately 
 commence their operations, by depositing bony matter, where it 
 IS required to unite fractured bones, and nervous substance to 
 heul the wounded nerve. 
 
 Give a proof of thr over-chansiiif; stntc of the bod) . Give other in 
 stances illui;trative of the chaiigcfiil state oi tlio body. 247. By what ves- 
 sels is the reiie\^l of every part of the body perfeitcd ? 248. What is said 
 of the office of the rmtrieiit capillary vessels .' When a bone is fractured, 
 »i what pro'jess is it hcalcd ? 
 
88 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENK. 
 
 Fig. 53. 
 
 I 
 
 Fig. .^. A front view <iftlie organs within llie rhest and alidnrncn. 1, 1, 1, I, Th« 
 muacles of the chest. 2,2,2,3, 'I'he rihs. :<, .1, 3, 'I'he upper, middle, ami lower 
 lobes of the Jiglit lung. 4, 4, The <ohes of the lef. lung. 5, The ri^'^ht ventricle of 
 the heart. G, The left ventricle. 7, The right auricle of the heart, 8, The left ami 
 cle. 9, The pulmonary artery. 10, The aorta. 11, The vena sava dcscendena. 
 12, The trachea. 13, The OBsophagns, 14, 14, 14, 14, The pleura. 15, 15, 15, Tha 
 diaphragm 16, 16, The right and left lobe of the liver. 17, Tlie gall-cyst. 18, Th« 
 stomach 26, The spleen. 19, 19, The duodenum. 20, The ascending colon. 
 21, The transverse colon. 25, The descending colon. 22, 22, S, 22, The small In 
 t««tine8. 23, 23, 7Ae abdominal walls turned down. 24, The thoracic iuct, openinf 
 •nto the left subclavian vein, (27.) 
 
ANATOMY CF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. 89 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. 
 
 219 The nutrient portion of the food is poured into the 
 vein at tlie lower part of the neck, and is carried to the right 
 cavities of the heart. The fluid in these cavities consists of the 
 3hyle mixed with the venous blood. Neither of these two 
 elements is fitted to promote the growth or repair the waste of 
 the body. They must be subjected to a process, by whi.'h the 
 first can be converted into blood, and the second freed of its 
 impurities, (carbonic acid and water.) This is effected by 
 the Respiratory Organs. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE llESriRATORY ORGANS. 
 
 250. The organs of respiration are the Lungs^ (lights;) 
 *he Tra'clie-a, (wind-pipe ;) the Bronch'i-a, (subdivisions of 
 tlie trachea ;) and the Air Ves'i-cles^ (air-cells at the extrem- 
 ities of the bronchia.) The Di'a-phragm, (midriff;) ribs, and 
 several muscles, also aid in the respiratory process. 
 
 251. The LUNGS are conical organs, one on each side of the 
 chest, embracing the heart, and separated from each other by a 
 membranous partition. The color of the lungs is a pinkish gray, 
 mottled, and variously marked with black. They are com- 
 posed of air-cells and tubes, beside many small blood-vessels. 
 
 252. Each lung is surrounded by a membrane, called the 
 
 249. What f \ids are conveyed into the right cavities cf the heart ? What 
 is necessary before they can be adapted to the wants of the body ? By what 
 organs are these changes effected ? 250 — 256. Gii'e the anatomy of th» 
 espiratory organs. 2.'30. Name the respiratory organs, WTiat organs also 
 aid in the respiratory process ? 251. Describe the lungs. 2.52. Describe 
 the pleura. 
 
 8» 
 
90 ANATOMY, niYSIOLOGY, AND n\'OIENX. 
 
 r 
 
 pleura^ wliicli not only surrounds those organs, but is reflected 
 upon the walls of the chfst. The lungs, liowever, are on the 
 outside of the pleura, in the same way as the head is on tlie 
 outside of a cap doubled upon itself. 
 
 Observation. When this membrane, tliat covers the lunTs, 
 and also lines the chest, is inflamed, the disease is called 
 " pleurisy." 
 
 SoS. The TRACHEA is situated in the front part of the neck, 
 and extends from the mouth to tlie lungs. It is composed of 
 cartilaginous rings, which are very elastic. 
 
 254. The bronchia are the divisions of the trachea at its 
 lower extremity, behind the upper part of the heart. One 
 bmnch r^isses to the right lung, and the other to the left. 
 These brinches, upon entering the lung, divide into an almost 
 infinity of smaller branches. 
 
 IHustratinn. The trachea may be compared to the trunk of 
 a tree ; the bronchia to two large branches ; the subdivisions of 
 the bronchia to the branchlets and twigs ; the air-cells to the 
 buds seen on the twigs in the spring. 
 
 255. The air-cells are very small sacs, or bladders, at the 
 end of the minute divisions of the bronchia. Their walls are 
 extremely thin, the interior of which, as well as the trachea 
 and bronchia, are lined by mucous membrane. These cells 
 are variable in size, and are most numerous in the middle and 
 lower part of the lungs. 
 
 Ohserration. When the mucous membrane of a few of the 
 
 larger branches of the wind-pipe is slightly inflamed, it is called 
 
 a " cold ; " when the inflammation is greater, and extends to the 
 
 lesser air-tubes, it is called bronchitis. Coughing is a violent 
 
 expulsory effort, by which air is suddenly forced through the 
 
 bronchia and trachea to remove offending matter. 
 
 » 
 
 "WTiat is tho disease called when this membrane is inflamed ? 253. De- 
 sciioe the trachea. 2'54. What are the bronchia? To what may tlie 
 trachea and branches be compared ? 2'5o. Describe the air-cells. Wh«re 
 are tlicy tht most numerous ? Mention some diseases of the membrane 
 that lines the bronchia. 
 
ANATOMY OF THE KESPIRArORY ORGANS. 
 
 d1 
 
 Observation. Tho structure of the tracliea nnfl liinps may 
 bo illustrated by taking those parts of a calf or sheep, and 
 .nflating the bronchial tubes by forcing:; air into the wind-pipe 
 V'\th a pipe or quill. Tho internal structure may then bo 
 seen by opening tho dillbrent parts. 
 
 Fig. 64. 
 
 Fig. 54. A representation of the larynx, trachea, bronchia, and air-cells 1, 1 , 1, An 
 luitline of the right lung. 2,2,2, An outline of the left lung, 3, Tho larjnx. 
 i, The trachcii. .5, The right hronchial tube. 6, The left bronchial tube. 7, 7, 7, 
 P, 8, 8, Bronchial tubes of riglit and left lung. 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, Air-colls. 
 
 256. The diaphragm is a flexible, circular partition, that sep- 
 antes the respiratory from the digestive organs, and the chest 
 
 How can the structure of the trachea and lungs be illustrated ? 256. De- 
 scribe the diaphragm. 
 
92 
 
 ANATOMY, niYSIOLOGV, AND IIYPWENE. 
 
 from tlje alHlomcn. Its margin is attached to the spina! column 
 the sternum, and cartilages of the Utwer ribs. In a state of re« 
 pose, Its centre rises into the chest in the form of an arch. 
 When air is forcibly expelled from the lungs, its upper point 
 reaches as high as I he fourth rib. It is depressed as low as the 
 seventh rib, when air is drawn into the lungs. 
 
 Fig. 55. 
 
 Fig. 56. 
 
 Fig 55i A section of tlie clicst when the lungs are inflated. 1, The diaphragm. 
 a. The muscular walls of the abdomen. 
 
 Fig. .W. A section of the cheai when the lungs are ccmtrnrted. 1, The diaphragm, 
 in common expiration. 2, 2, The muscular walls of the ahdomnn. 3, The positioa 
 of the diaphragm in forced expiration. 
 
 These engravings show the dinphrngm to he more convex, and the walls of tha 
 abdomen more flattened, when the lungs are collapsed, than when they are inflatCo. 
 
 What is its form when not in action ? How high does its central poition 
 rise in forced expiration ? How low does it descend when air is drawn into 
 the lungs ? What do figs. 55 and 56 illustrate ? 
 
I'UYHIOLOUY OF illE RESPlRATORy OIIGANS. 93 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE RESPIRATORY 
 
 ORGANS. 
 
 257. Respiration, or brenthinjjj, is that process by which 
 air is drawn into tliu kings and expelled from ihein. The prin- 
 cipal object in breathing, in animals, is to free the dark blood 
 of one of tiie princi|)ai substances that com[)ose the old and 
 useless particles of the body. 
 
 258. When air is drawn into the lungs, the muscular margin 
 of the diaphragm contmcts, which depresses its central portion ; 
 the chest is then enlarged at the expense of .'he abdomen. At 
 the same time that the diaphragm is depresv-ed, the ribs are 
 thrust forward and upward by means of nmscles placed be- 
 tween and on them. Thus the chest is enlarged in every 
 direction. 
 
 259. The lungs follow the variations of capacity in the chest, 
 expanding their air-cells when tl»e latter is enlarged, and con- 
 tracting when the chest is diminished. Thus, when the chest 
 Is expanded, the lungs follow, and consequently a vacuum is 
 produced in their air-cells. The air then rushes through the 
 mouth and nose into the trachea and its branches, and fills the 
 vacuum as fast as it is made. This mechanical process 
 constitutes inspiration. 
 
 260. After the expansion of the chest, the muscles that ele- 
 vated the ribs relax, together with tiie diai)liragm. The (ilas- 
 ticity of the cartilages of the ribs depresses tliom, and the 
 
 257 — 266 Give the vsc of the respiratory orrjan.i. 207. Mliat is rcspira 
 tion? What is the principal objrct in breathing ? 2-5S. Dpsrribe how the 
 chest is enlarged in respiration ? 'L'i'^. Do tlic lungs follmv the variations 
 uf capacity in the chest ? What constitutes inspiration ? 260. How is the 
 air expelled I'loiu the lungs ? 
 
 • maa^ 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-S) 
 
 V 
 
 // 
 
 
 
 :/ 
 
 5r ^/^ 
 
 1.0 Iritt IIIIIM 
 
 I.I 
 
 '" lift 
 
 ■^ 140 
 
 U2 Mb 
 
 1.25 ! 
 
 1.4 
 
 M 
 
 2.2 
 
 III 2.0 
 
 1.6 
 
 V] 
 
 <^ 
 
 /i 
 
 // 
 
 ^3 
 
 w/ ""^ "^' 
 
 
 '^' 
 
 '/ 
 
 "%, 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sdences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 V 
 
 
 \ 
 
 a^ 
 
 ^^V^ 
 
 %^^\. ^r^^ WrC<^' 
 
 <i3 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 'Q) 
 
 rt^ 
 
94 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AJiD HYGIENE. 
 
 cavity of the cliest is diminished, attended by tho sxpulsion of 
 a portion of the air from the lungs. At the same time, the 
 muscles that form the front walls of the abcbminal cavity, con- 
 tract and press the alimentary canal, stomach, and liver, up- 
 ward against the diaphragm ; this, being relaxed, yields to llie 
 pressure, rises upward, and presses upon the lung£; which re- 
 treat before it, and another portion of uir is expelJed from theso 
 or^^uns. This process is called expiration. 
 
 Fig. 67. 
 
 Fig. 57. A Tront view of the chest and abduineii in respiration. 1, 1, The poeitioB 
 of the w'ulls of tile cliest in inspirntion. 2, 2, 2, The [losition of the diaphragm in 
 Inspiration. 3, 3, The position of the walls of the chest in expiration. 4, 4, 4, The 
 pouition of 'ho dinphrugin in expirntion. 5, 5, The position of the walls of U\e abdo- 
 men in inspiration. 6, 6, The position of the walls of the abdomen in expiration. 
 
 261. Thus it is obvious that the enlargement of the cheSt, 
 or inspiration, is produced in two ways — 1st. By the d«pres- 
 
 What does this constitute ? Explain fig. 57. 
 Jk« cheat enl uged i Name them. 
 
 261. In how many vays is 
 
PHYSIOLOGY OF THE RESPIRATOHY ORfJAJMS. 95 
 
 xon of the central, arched portion of the diaphragm. 2d By 
 the elevation of the ribs. On the contrary, the contraction of the 
 chest, or expiration, is produced by the depression of the riba 
 and elevation of the central part of the diaphragm. These 
 movements are successive during life, and constitute res- 
 piration. 
 
 Experiment. Pjace the ear upon the chest of a person, and 
 a murmuring sound will be heard, somewhat like the soft sigh- 
 ings of the wmd through forest trees. This sound is caused 
 by the air rushing in and out of the lungs, and is peculiarly 
 distinct in the child. 
 
 262. As before mentioned, the dark, impure blood, that 
 passes from the heart to the lungs, is unfit to sustain the vita) 
 action of the various organs of the body. Its impurities must 
 be removed. When this is done, the blood loses its blackish 
 red color, and becomes of a bright scarlet red. 
 
 263. The dark color of the blood is owing to the presence 
 of carbonic gas. This is formed in the blood-vessels by the 
 union of carbon (the principal element of the dead, waste 
 atoms) and oxygen. 
 
 264. There is also, mixed with the dark blood, hydrogen, 
 which, when united with oxygen, forms water. Both carbon and 
 hydrogen are supplied to the blood through the food. They 
 are carried out of the system not only by the lungs, but by the 
 skin and othei* organs. 
 
 Observation. The presence of carbonic acid and watery 
 vapor in the expired air, can be proved by the following 
 experiments. 1st. Breathe into lime-water, and in a few 
 minutes it will become of a milk-white color. This is owing 
 to the carbonic acid of the breath unitmg witli the lime, 
 forming the carbonate of lime. 
 
 How is it conlraoted ? Wliat do these successive movements cob- 
 ■titute ? Give an experiment, 262. What change must be made in the 
 blood before it can sustain Mfe ? 263. To what is f>»e dark color of the 
 blood owing? Where is tais gas formed? 264. What element beside 
 •■rbon la found in the bluod ? What dues it form w^en united with oxygen ? 
 
90 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, /ND HYGIENE. 
 
 2d. Breathe upon a cold, dry mirror, for a few minutes, and 
 it will be covered with moisture. This is condensed vapor 
 from the lungs. In warm weather, this watery vapor is invisible 
 ill the expired air ; but, in a cold, dry morning in winter, the suc- 
 cessive jets of vapor issuing from the mouth and nose are 
 BufTiciently obvious. 
 
 265. Atmospheric air, or tha which fills the air-cells of the 
 lungs, is composed of two gases, ox'y-gen and ni'tro-gen. Oxy- 
 gen has the property o! supposing life, while nitrogen alone 
 would destroy it. But combined with the former gas, it serves 
 to neutralize the otherwise irritating action of the oxygen. 
 
 Pig. 58. 1, .- bronchial tube divided into three branches. 2, 2, 2, Air cells. 
 
 3, Branches of the puhnona/y artery, that spread over the a.r-cells. Through the 
 pulmonary artery, the dark, impure blood is carried to the xir-cells of the lungs. 
 
 4, Rranciies of the pulmonary vein, that commence at the minutt^ terminations of the 
 pulmonary artery. Through the pulmonary vein, the red blood is returned to the heart. 
 
 266. We will now pass to the change which the air effects 
 when it comes in contact with the blood in the lungs. As the 
 impure blood is passing in the minute vessels over the air-cells, 
 the oxygen passes through th^ extreme thin coats of the air- 
 cells and blood-vessels, and unites with the blood. At the same 
 time, the carbonic acid and watery vapor leave the blood, and 
 pass through the coats of the blood-vessels and air-cells, and 
 irix with the air in the cells. These are expelled from the air- 
 
 ^ow are these elements supplied to the blood ? How may the presonco 
 
 o. Trbonic acid in the expired air be proved ? The presence of watery 
 
 vapor ? 265. Of what is the air composed "* "What property has oxygen ? 
 
 Has nitrogen ? 266. Explaiu how the blood is changed by the action of 
 
 oe air. 
 
 ■-«s^: 
 
PHVSIOLOGY OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. 
 
 97 
 
 cells every time we breathe. This interchange of gases pro- 
 duces the change in the color of the blood. 
 
 Eicperimenl. To show that gases may be interchanged 
 through membranes, fill a bladder with dark blood drawn from 
 any ^nimal. Tie the bladder closely, and suspend it in the 
 air. In a few hours, the blood next the membrane will have 
 become of a bright red color. This is owing to the oxygen 
 from the air passing through the bladder, and unit>»>g with the 
 blood, while the carbonic acid has escaped through ihr mi^^t*. 
 
 branc. 
 
 Fig. 69. 
 
 Pif .59. An ideal view of the pulmonary cirriilntion. 1, 1, The lipht luuR. 
 2, a, The left lung. 3, The tiiichea. 4, The hplit hronrhiai tube. 5, Tttti U'tt 
 bronchial tube. 6. C, 6, G, Air-rells. 7, The right auricle. 8, The riglit ventricle. 
 9, Tne iricuspia vaIv3B. 10, The p\ilinonary artery. II, The branch to the rifsht 
 lung. 12, The branch to the left lung. 13, The right pulmonary vein. 14, The 
 left pulinonmy vein. 15, The left auricle. 16, The left ventricle. 17. TIm 
 mitral valves. 
 
 yote. Let a /eview of the anatomy and physiology of the respiratory 
 organs be given from figs. 5'S, f)\), or fiom outline anatomical plates 5 and 7 
 
 9 
 
98 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AlsD HYGIENE. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS 
 
 267. For man to enjoy the highest degree of health, it is 
 necessary that the impure " venous " blood be properly changed. 
 As this is eftected in the lungs by the action of the air, it follows 
 that this element, when breathed, should be pure, or contain 
 twenty-one per cent, of oxygen to about seventy-nine per 
 cent, of nitrogen. 
 
 268. The quality or purity of the air is affected by every 
 respiration. The quantity of nitrogen is nearly the same in 
 the expired, as in the inspired air. But the quantity of oxygen 
 is diminished, and that of carbonic acid is increased. Thus, 
 every time we force air from the lungs, it becomes unfit u> be 
 breathed again. 
 
 Experiment. Sink a glass jar that has a stop-cock, or one 
 with a glass stopper, into a pail of water, until the air is expelled 
 from the jar. Fill the lungs with air, and retain it in the chest 
 a short time, and then breathe, into the jar, and instantly close 
 the stop-cock. Close the opening of the jar that is under the 
 water with a piece of paper laid on a plate of sufficient size to 
 cover the opening, invert the jar, and sink into it a lighted candle. 
 The flame will be extinguished as quickly as if put in water.* 
 
 • As a aubatitute for a jar with a stop-cock, take a piece of lead 
 pipe bent in the form of a siphon, and insert it in the mouth of a 
 reversed J£ir. This experiment is as conclusive whether the air is in- 
 h;ilcd once only, or breathed many times. 
 
 267 — 285. Give the hygietw of the respiratory organs. 267. What is ne- 
 cessary that man may enjoy the highest degree of health ? AVhat propor- 
 t'on of oxygen and nitrogen should the inspired air contain ? 268. What 
 iB the differrtnoe bet^veen inspired and expired air ? How can this differ- 
 ence be shown i 
 
HYGIENE OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. 99 
 
 Remove the carbonic acid by inverting the jar, and place i lighted 
 candle in it, and the flame will be as clear as when out of the jar. 
 
 ObservaHon. It is familiarly known that a taper will not 
 burn where carbonic acid exists in any considerable quantity, 
 or when there is a marked deficiency of oxygen. From this 
 originated the judicious practice of sinking a lighted candle into 
 a well or pit before descending into it. If the flame is extin* 
 (juished, respiration cannot there be maintained, and life would 
 be sacrificed should a person venture in until the noxious air 
 is removed. 
 
 269. Air, in which lamps will not huin with brilliancy, is 
 unfitted for respiration. In crowded rooms, which are not 
 ventilated, the air is vitiated, not ouly by a decrease of oxygen 
 and an increase of carbonic aci<i, but by the waste, injurious 
 atoms thrown out from the lungs and skin of tlie audience. 
 The burning lamps, under fmch circumstances, emit but a feeble 
 light. Let t!ie oxygen gas be more and more expended, and 
 the lamps will burn more and more feebly, until nearly ex- 
 tinguished. 
 
 Illustrations. 1st. The effects of breathing the same air 
 again and again, are well illustrated by an incident that occurred 
 in one of our halls of learning. A large audience had assembled 
 in an ill-ventilated room, to listen to a lecture ; soon the lamps 
 burned so dimly that the speaker and audience were nearly en- 
 veloped in darkness. The oppression, dizziness, and faintness, 
 experienced by many of the audience, induced them to leave ; 
 and in a few minutes after, the lamps were observed to rekindle, 
 owing to the exchange of pure air on opening the door, which 
 supplied to them oxygen. 
 
 2d. The " Blacl: Hole of Calcutta " received its name from 
 the fact, that one hundred and forty-six Englishmen were shut 
 
 "Why should a lighted candle be sunk in a well or pit before a person 
 descends into it ? 269. How is the air of crowded, unventilated roomt 
 Titiated ? What effect has such air upon the burning lamps ? Give an 
 incident that illustrates the effects of impure air upon burning lamps. 
 
 MtMBMillMlWIlH 
 
iOO ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY^, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 up in a room eighteen feet square, with only two small windows 
 on the same side to admit air. On opening this dungeon, ten 
 hours after their imprisonment, only twenty-three were alive. 
 The others had died from breathing impure air, that contained 
 animal matter from their own bodies. 
 
 270. Churches, concert-halls, and school-rooms should he 
 leeU ventilated. If they are not, the persons assembled in them 
 will be restless, and complain of languor, and perhaps head- 
 ache. These unpleasant sensations are caused by a want of 
 pure air, to give an adequate supply of oxygen to the lungs. 
 
 Observation. In all school-rooms, where there is nol ade- 
 quate ventilation, it is advisable to have a recess of five or ten 
 minutes each hour. During this time, let the pupils braathe 
 fresh air, and open the doors and windows, so that the air of the 
 room shall be completely changed. 
 
 271. While occupying a room, we are insensible to the grad- 
 ual vitiation of the air. This is the result of the diminished 
 sensibility of the nervous system, and gradual adaptation of the 
 organs to blood of a less stimulating character. 
 
 272. In the construction of every inhabited room, there 
 should be adequate means of ventilation, as well as warming. 
 No room ie well ventilated, unless as much pure air is brought 
 into it, as the occupants vitiate at every respiration. This can 
 be efiected by making an aperture in the ceiling of the room, 
 or by constructing a ventilating flue in the chimney. This 
 should be in contact with the flues for the escape of smoke, but 
 separated from them by a thin brick partition. 
 
 273. Provision should also be made, by which pure air 
 may be constantly coining into the room, as the crevices of the 
 
 Of the effects of brcn tiling impure air. 270. Why should churches and 
 Bchool-rooms be well ventilated ? "W hat suggestion when a school-room ia 
 not well ventilated ? 271. Why are we insensible of the vitiation of the 
 air of the room in which we are seated ? 272. What is very important in 
 the construction of every inhabited room ? Eow can a room be well venti- 
 mted ? 273. Should provision be made to have pure air introduced into 
 a room? 
 
HYGIENE OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. 
 
 101 
 
 doors and windows are not sufTicient. There should be an 
 aperture at or near the floor, to connect with the outer walls of 
 the building or external air, 
 
 274. The sick-room, particularly, should be so arranged that 
 the impure air may escape, and pure air be constantly coming 
 into the room. Curtains around the bed, and the sheet over the 
 face, are injurious. The efiect is similar to the* produced by 
 sleeping in a small, unventilated room. 
 
 275. The change that is effected in the blood while passing 
 through the lungs, not only depends upon the purity of the air, 
 but the amount inspired. The quantity varies according to the 
 . '^e of the chest, and the movement of the ribs and diaphragm. 
 
 Fig. 60. 
 
 Fig. 61. 
 
 Fig. 60. The skeleton of a deformed chest. 
 Fig. 61. The skeleton of a well-formed chest. 
 
 276. The size of the chest and lungs can be diminished by 
 moderate and continued pressure. This is most easily done in 
 infancy, when the cartilages and ribs are very pliant ; yet it 
 can be effected at more advanced periods of life. 
 
 Observations. 1st. The Chinese, by compressing the feet of 
 female children, prevent their growth ; so tha. the foot of a 
 
 274. What rooms particularly should be well ventilated ? "Why are cur- 
 tains around abed injurious? 275. What varies the amount of air received 
 Into the lungs ? 276. How can the size of the chest be diminished ? What 
 does fig. 60 represent ? Fig. 61 ? Give observation Ist. 
 0» 
 
102 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 Chinese belle is not larger than the fool of an American girl of 
 five years. 
 
 2d. The American women compress their chests, to prevent 
 their growtli ; so that the chest of an American belle is not 
 laryor than the chest of a Chinese girl of five years. Which 
 country, in this respect, exhibits the greater intelligence ? 
 
 3d. The chest can be deformed by making the linings of the 
 waists of the dresses tight, as well as by corsets. Tight vesta, 
 upon ihe same principle, are also injurious. 
 
 Fig. 62. Fig. 63. 
 
 F {. 6SL A correct outline of the Venus do Medici, the heau ideal of female lym 
 metry. 
 
 Fig. 63. An outline of a well-corseted modern beauty. One hai an artificial 
 'nsect waist ; the other, a nntnrni waist. One has sloping shoulders, while the shoul 
 ders of the other are comparativeiy elevated, square, and angu.lnr. The proportion of 
 Jhe corseted female below the waist, is also a departure frcx the sy^rmetry of nature 
 
 277. In children, who have never worn close garments, the 
 circumference of the chest is generally about equi.1 to that of 
 
 Give observation 2(1. How may the chest be defortred as given by obser- 
 tetion 3d ? 277. What is the size of the chest of a child that haa always 
 von loose clothing t 
 
HYGIENE OF THE RESriRATORY ORGANS. 103 
 
 Jie body at the hips ; and similar proportions would exiHt 
 through life, if there were no improper pressure of the clothmg. 
 Those persons that have large, full chests, particularly at the 
 lower part, are not so liable to diseases of the lungs, as those 
 who have narrow, contracted chests. 
 
 278. A contracted chest, caused either by injudicious dress- 
 ing, or by any other means, can be enlarged, although the 
 person is thirty years of age, by permitting the muscles hat 
 elevate the ribs and diaphragm to perform their proper function. 
 
 Observation. Scholars, and persons who sit much of the 
 time, should frequently, during the day, breathe full and deep, 
 BO that the smallest air-cells may be fully filled with air. While 
 exercising the lungs, the shoulders should be thrown back and 
 the head held erect. 
 
 279 When the lungs are properly filled with air, the chest 
 is enlarged in every direction. If any article of apparel is 
 wc :" so tight as to prevent the full expansion of the chest and 
 abdomen, the lungs, in consequence, do not receive air sufii- 
 cient to purify the blood. The penalty for thus violating a 
 law of our being, is disease and suffering. 
 
 Observation. Many individuals do not realize the small 
 amount of pressure that will prevent the enlargement of the 
 chest. This can be shown by drawing a tape tightly around 
 the lower part of the chest of a vigorous adult, and confining it 
 with the thumb and finger. Then endeavor fully to inflate the 
 lungs, and the movement of the ribs will be much restricted. 
 
 280. The position in standing and sitting injluences the 
 movement of the ribs and diaphragm. When the shoulders are 
 thrown back, and when a person stands or sits erect, the dia- 
 
 What persons are most free from diseases of the lungs ? 278. Cam 
 narrow, contracted chests be enlarged ? How ? What practice is recoTi- 
 mended to scholars and sedentary persons ? 279. What is the efl'ect if tne 
 apparel is worn so tight as to prevent the full expansion of the chest ? H . w 
 can the amount of pressure necessary to prevent the enlargement of f.ie 
 chest be shown ? 280. Shaw the effect of position on the movement of th« 
 riba and diaphragm. 
 
»04 ANATOMV, PUYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 phragm and ribs Imve more frecflom of motion, and the abdomi- 
 nal muscles act mor« efricienty ; thus the lungs have broader 
 range of movement, than vkrhen the shoulders incline forward, 
 and the body is stooping. 
 
 281. The state of the mind exercises a great influence upon 
 respiration. If we are depressed by grief, or feel anxious 
 about friends or property, the diaphragm and muscles that ele- 
 vate the ribs will not contract with the same energy as when the 
 mind is influer ce(! by joy, mirth, and other enlivening emotions. 
 Consequently, our breathing is not, as frequent and full in the 
 "ormer as in the latter condition. 
 
 282. To recover persons apj)arently droumed^ it is necessary 
 o press the chest, suddenly and forcibly, downward and back- 
 ward, and instantly discontinue the pressure. Repeat this 
 without intermission, until a pair of bellows can be procured. 
 When the bellows are obtained, introduce the nozzle well upon 
 the base of the tongue, and surround the Jth and nose with 
 a towel or handkerchief, to close them. Let another person press 
 upon the projecting part of the neck, called "Adam's apple," 
 while air is introtiuced into the lungs through t' bellows. Then 
 press upon the chest, to force the air from the lungs, tc imitate 
 natural breathing. 
 
 283. Continue the use of the bellows, and forcing the air out 
 of the chest, for an hour at least, unless signs of natural breath- 
 ing come on. Wrap the body in warm, dry blankets, aud place 
 it near the fire, to preserve the natural warmth, as weU as to 
 impart artificial heat. Every thing, however, is secon'^ary to 
 filling the lungs with air. Avoid all friction until breathing is 
 restored. Send for medical aid immediately. 
 
 28'1. In cases of apparent death from hanging or stran- 
 gling, the knot should be untied or cut immediately ; thm uso 
 artificial respiration, or breathing, as directed in apparent death 
 
 281. Does the state of the mind influence our breathing? 285V How 
 should persons apparently drowned be tieated ? 284. How should V*pa- 
 rent death from strangling be managed ? 
 
HTGlfiNE OF THE RESPIRATORY ORGANS. ' lOA 
 
 from drowning. In asphyxia from electricity, (lightning,) luti- 
 ficial respiration slioutd 1x3 resorted to. 
 
 Observation. It is a common impression, in many sections 
 of ihe country, that tlie law will not allow the removal of the 
 cord from the neck of a body found suspended, unless the cor- 
 oner be present. It is therefore proper to say, that no such 
 delay is necessary, and that no time should be lost in attempting 
 to resuscitate the a*.rangled person. 
 
 285. When life is apparently suspended, from breathing 
 carbonic acid gas, the person should be carried into the open 
 air. The head and shoulders should be slightly elevated, the 
 face and chest should be sponged or sprinkled with cold water, 
 or cold vinegar and water. Apply fricl'jn to the skin, with a 
 coarse cloth or flesh-brush, and resort to artificial respiration. 
 
 Observation. 1st. Many persons have died from breathing 
 carbonic acid that was formed by burning charcoal in an open 
 pan or portable furnace, for the purpose of warming their 
 sleeping-rooms. 
 
 2d. In resuscitating persons apparently dead from the already 
 mentioned causes, if a pair of bellows cannot be procured im- 
 mediately, let their lungs be inflated by air expelled from the 
 lungs of some person present. To have the expired air as pure 
 as possible, the person should quickly inflate his lungs, and in- 
 stantly expel the air into those of the asphyxiated person. Place 
 the patient in pure air^ admit attendants only into the apartment, 
 and send for a 'physician without delay. 
 
 What treatment should be adopted in asphyxia from lightninp* What 
 is 8P.id of the impression, common in some sections of the country whrni 
 a body is found suspended? 285. What should be done when carbonk 
 acid has been inhaled ? What sad results frequently follow the burning of 
 charcoal in a close room ? Give the 2d observation. 
 
106 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENS 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 ANIMAL HEAT. "" 
 
 286. The true sources of animal heat are still imperfecrt'y 
 known. We see certain phenomena, but the causes are hidden 
 from our view. Its regular production, to a certain degree, is 
 essential both to animal and vegetable life. 
 
 287. The temperature} of the human body is about ninety- 
 eight degrees, whether we examine it in the Icelander in his 
 snowy hut, or the Negro under an equatorial sun. 
 
 288. To enable man to maintain an equilibrium of temper- 
 ature under such extremes of heat and cold, naturally suggests 
 two inquiries. 1st. By what organs is animal heat generated ? 
 2d. By what means is its uniformity maintained ? 
 
 289. In combustion, or burning of wood, coal, oil, dec, tlie 
 oxygen of the atmosphere unites with the carbon and hydrogen 
 of these substances, and carbonic acid and watery vapor are 
 produced. This process is attended with the disengagement 
 of heat. 
 
 290. The quantity of heat disengaged in combustion is 
 always in proportion to the amount of carbon and hydrogen 
 consumed ; thus a piece of wood weighing one pound, in 
 burning slowly, would give out the same quantity of heat as a 
 pound of shavings of the same wood, in burning rapidly. Upon 
 the principle of combustion, the production of animal heat may 
 be understood. 
 
 286 — 296. What is said res]>ectmg animal heat f 286. lathe true source 
 of animal heat known ? 287. What is the temperature of the human body ? 
 288. What i-^quiries are naturally suggested ? 289. What takes place in the 
 combustion, or burning of wood, oil, &c. ? 290. Upon what does the quan- 
 tity ol heat disengnged in combustion depend ? How is tb'« illustratei ? 
 
ANIMAL HEAT. 10^ 
 
 291. As Defore mentioned, the fcx>d contains CArbon aad 
 hydrogen. These exist in the chyle. The old and waste 
 atoms of the body, Hkewise, contain the same elements. It ia 
 now supposed that the oxygen of the inspired air enters the 
 capillary vessels of the lungs, and mingles with the blood, with 
 which it is carried to the heart, and from thence to the nutrient 
 capillary vessels of every part of the system. 
 
 292. In the capillary vessels, the oxygen of the arterial 
 blood uiiites with the carbon and hydrogen of the waste atoms 
 (which are conveyed into the blood by the lymphatics,) and 
 carbonic acid and water are formed. 
 
 293. This change of state among the particles of bodiaa 
 is attended with the disengagement of heat. The carbonic 
 acid and water are returned to the lungs in the blo.jd, and car- 
 ried out of the body by the expired air. The inference is, that 
 heat is generated in every part of the body. 
 
 294. Our next inquiry is, by what means is the uniformity 
 of temperature in the body maintained ? It has been ascer- 
 taitied that the principal agent in keeping the body at a uni- 
 form temperature, is the immense evaporation that takes place 
 from the skin and lungs. 
 
 295._ When cold air comes in contact with these membranes, 
 heat is given off to restore the equilibrium. The quantity de- 
 pends somewhat on the rapidity of the change of air. And 
 this is greatest v/hen we are in a current of dry air, or a brisk 
 wind is blowing upon us. 
 
 296. The skin, in an ordinary state, is constantly giving out 
 a watery fluid, which is converted into vapcj and carried off by 
 the surrounding air. To effect this, heat is taken from the 
 system, and the conversion of the perspiration into vapor 
 
 291. From what source are the carbor and hydrogen in the body derived ? 
 The oxygen ? 292. Show how heat may be produced in every part of the 
 body. 294. Wliat is the principal agent by which a uniform tempersi 
 ture of the body is maintained ? 295. What is the effect when cold Bit 
 comes in contact with these membranes ? When is the greatest amouut 
 *f heat given off? 296. How is the surplus heat of the body remotftd. 
 
lOlJ? ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 conveys a large proporlion of the surplus heat frotn the body; 
 and in consequence, the temperature is maintained at ninety- 
 eight degrees. 
 
 Ohseniations. 1st. In all ages and climes, it has been 
 observed, that the increased temperature of the skin and 
 system in fevers, is abated as soon as free perspiration is 
 restored. 
 
 2d. In damp, close weather, as during the sultry days of 
 August, we feel a disagreeable sensation of heat, because the 
 saturation of the air by moisture prevents the escape of heat 
 through the lungs and skin. 
 
 HYGIENE OF ANIMAL HEAT. 
 
 297. The amount of heat generated in the human system 
 depends upon the quantity and quality of the food, age, exer- 
 cise, the amount and character of the inspired air, condition of 
 the brain, skin, and general system. 
 
 298. Animal heat is modijied by the proportion of carbon 
 which the food contains^ and by the quantity consumed. As 
 the kind of fuel that contains the greatest amount of combus- 
 tible material gives ofT the most heat when burned, so those 
 articles of food that contain the greatest quantity of carbon pro- 
 Himo the most heat when converted into blood. 
 
 299. Age is another injtuence that modifies the generation 
 of animal heat. The vital forces of the child being feeble, less 
 heat is generated in its system than in that of an adult. Hence 
 the young child, and the enfeebled, aged person, need more 
 clothing than the vigorous individual of middle age. - 
 
 What has been observed in all ages and climes ? Why do %ve feel a dis- 
 agreeable sensation of heat in the sultry days of August ? 297 — 304. O'im 
 the hygiene ofam'tnal heat. 297. On what does the amount of heat gener- 
 ated in the human system depend ? 298. What element o? the food m- 
 Guences the generation of heat ? 299. Does age modify the feneration of 
 aeat ? What persons need the most clothing ? 
 
'.1'\ '■ ■ 
 
 HYGIENE OF ANIMAL HEAT. 109 
 
 300. Exercise is an injluence that modifies the generation 
 pf animal heat. Whatever increases the llow of blood in the 
 system, increases also the deposition of new atoms of matter, 
 and the removal of the waste particles. This ciiange among the 
 particles of matter is attended with an elevation of temperature. 
 For this reason, a person in action is warmer than in a slate 
 of repose. 
 
 301. Tlie amount and character of the air which is breathed^ 
 modify the heat of the system. In the generation of heat in 
 a stove, air, or oxygen, is as essential as the wood or coal. It 
 IS equally so in the production of animal heat. The oxygen 
 of the inspired air should be in proportion to the carbon and 
 hydrogen to be consumed. This requires capacious lungs, to- 
 gether with free movements of the ribs and diaphragm. 
 
 302. The condition of the brain and nervous system affects 
 the generation of animal heat. If the mind is aroused from 
 fear, the breathing becomes slow, and a chilliness peivades the 
 body, particularly the extremities ; while, on the other hand, 
 joyous and agreeable emotions quicken the circulation of the 
 blood, and this increases the generation of heat. 
 
 303. During sleep, when the brain is partially inactive, less 
 heat is generated than when awake. This is one reason why 
 an individual who sleeps in the same clothing that was ade- 
 quate to prevent chills while awake, contracts a cold, unless ho 
 throws over him an additional covering. 
 
 30'4. The system suffers less when the change of tempera^ 
 ture is gradual. The change in the production of heat, as 
 well as in the evaporation of fluids from the system, is gradual, 
 when not influenced by foreign causes. By this means, the 
 fx)dy IS enabled to endure tropical heat and polar cold. 
 
 300. What effect has exercise on animal heat ? 301. To -^hat should the 
 oxygen of the inspired air be proportional ? 302. Mention the effeota of 
 some of the emotions on animal heat. 303. Why dp we need more cloth> 
 ing when asleep than when awake ? 304. How is the body enabled to en- 
 dire tropical heat and polar cold ? 
 
 10 
 
110 ANATOMY. PUTSIOLOQY, AND HYOIUNB. 
 
 CHATTER XXIII. 
 
 THE VOICE. 
 
 305 The beautiful mechanism of tlie vocal instrument, 
 <vl)ich produces every variety of sound, from a harsh, un- 
 melodious tone, to a soft, sweet, flute-like sound, can never be 
 imitated by art. It has been compared, by many physiologists, 
 to a wind, reed, and stringed instrument. This inimitable, yet 
 simple instrument, is the Larynx. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE VOCAL ORGANS. 
 
 306. The LARYNX (Adam's apple) is a kind of cartilaginous 
 tube, wl ch, taken as a whole, has the general form of a hollow 
 reversed ne, with its base upward toward the tongue, in the 
 shape of an expanded triangle. 
 
 307. It is composed of several pieces of cartilage, that 
 aot only connect with each other, but with the tongue, 
 lower jaw, and trachea. 
 
 308. There are stretched across the cavity formed by 
 these cartilages, four folds of membrane, two on each side, 
 called vocal cords. 
 
 309. The space between the cords on each side is called 
 the glot'tis^ or chink of the glottis. The cavity between the 
 upper and lower vocal cords is called the ventricle of the 
 larynx. 
 
 30"'i — 310. Give the anntomy of the vocal organs. 305. What is said ot the 
 Btructiire of the vocal iui-trumcnt ? What instruments have physiologists 
 compared it with ? What is the vocal instrument called ? 106. Describo 
 the larynx. 307. Of what is it composed ? 308. Describe the ior*l cordsi 
 109. What is the space between these cords called ? 
 
PHYSIOLOGY OF THE VOCAL ORGANS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 310. Behind the base of the tongue, is a piece of car- 
 tilage, resembling a leaf of parsley, called the ep-i-glot'tis. 
 The duty of this sentinel is to keep the food and drink 
 from passing into the air-passage, or trachea. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE VOCAL ORGANS. 
 
 311. In the for'^i.ation of the voice, each part already de- 
 scribed performs an important office. The cartilages give form 
 and stability to the larynx, and by the action of muscles attached 
 to them, the width of the glottis is varied. 
 
 Fig. 63. 
 
 Fig. 63. 
 
 Fig. 63. A side view o the cartilaf^en of the larynx. I, The bone at th« root of 
 th) tongue. 3, 4, 5, 6, I cartilages of the larynx. 7, The trachea. 
 
 Fig. 63. A section of tlie larynx. 1,1, The upper vocal cords. 3, 2, The lowet 
 vocal cords. 3, 3, The glottis. 4, 4, The ventricles of the larynx. 
 
 312. When air is forcibly driven from the lungs through 
 the glottis, it causes a vibration, or trembling of the vocal 
 cords. This produces sound ; and it is varied by the tongue, 
 the teeth, and the lips. 
 
 810 Where is the epiglottis situated? 311, 313. Give tht function of 
 the vocal organs. 311. Of what use are the cartilages of the larynx* 
 What does fig. 62 represent ? Fig. 63? 312. How is sound oroduccd? 
 
112 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 313. The size of the larynx, the capacity and health cf the 
 lungs, the condit'cn of the throat and nasal passages, the eleva- 
 tion and depression of the chin and tongue, and the state of the 
 mind, influence the modulations of sound. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE VO^ AL ORGANS. 
 
 314. Common observation shows that the voice can !;"» 
 clianged and modified by the habits; sailors, smiths, and 
 others, who are engaged in noisy occupations, exert their 
 vocal organs more strongly than those of more quiet pursuits. 
 This not only affects the structure of the vocal organs, but 
 varies the intonations of the voice. 
 
 315. The voice is strong in proportion to the development 
 of the larynx^ and the capacity of the chest. Singing and 
 reading aloud, improve and strengthen the vocal organs, and 
 give a healthy expansion to the cliest. The enunciation of the 
 elementary sounds of the English language, aids in developing 
 the vor^al organs, as well as preventing disease of the ihroat 
 and lungs, {laryngitis and bronchitis.) 
 
 316. The attitude also affects the modulation of the voice^ 
 When an individual stands or sits with the head and trunk erect, 
 the movements of the whole respiratory apparatus are most 
 free and effective. Sound, in consequence, is more clear and 
 distinct. 
 
 Experiment. Read with the head bowed forward and the 
 chin depressed ; then read with the head erect and the chin ele- 
 vated, and the difference in the movement of the vocal organs, 
 together with the difference in the voice, will be manifest 
 
 bl3. What influences the modulation of sound? 314 — 321. Give the 
 hygiene of the vocal organs. 314. What does observation show in refeience 
 to the Toice ? 315. How may the voice be strengthened ? 316. "NVTiat 
 effect has the erect attitude upon tht modulations of the voice ? State 
 *he experiment. 
 
- H •■<•< ■^1.>WW' 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE VOCAL OHOj^NS. 
 
 113 
 
 Fig. 64. 
 
 Fig. 65. 
 
 Fig. 64. An improper position, but one not iinfrequently seen in some of our com- 
 II on schools, and in some of our public speakers. 
 
 Fig. 65. The proper position for reading, spealcing, and singing. 
 
 317. The muscles of the neck should not he vompressed. 
 If the muscles of the neck and larynx are compressed by a 
 high cravat, or other close dressing, not only will the free and 
 forcible use of these parts be impeded, but the tones, instead of 
 being clear and varied, will be feeble and ineffective. 
 
 Ohservati^ns. 1st. The loss of voice which is prevalent 
 among public speakers, may be ascribed in part to the in- 
 
 What is represented by fig. 64 ? By fig. 65 ? 317. Why should not th« 
 musclea of the neck be comprp 1 ? What is a common cause of loss of 
 Toice' V 
 
 10 • 
 
114 ANATOMY, niYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE, 
 
 judicious dressing of ihe neck, and improper position whtn 
 standing. 
 
 2d. When individuals hove been addressing an audience in 
 a warjp room, or engaged in sinr ^, they should avoid all 
 imprcsoions of a cold atmosphere, unless adequately protected 
 by an extia garment. 
 
 318. 2'he opening of the jaws^ and condition of the nasal 
 passages and throaty modify the voice. The enunciation of 
 words is rendered more or less distinct, in proportion as the 
 jaws are separated in speaking, and the throat and nasal pas- 
 sages are free from obstruction. 
 
 319. Repetition is essential to distinct articulation of 
 words. In teachmg a child to articulate a letter or word, in 
 the first instance, make an effort to induce a proper state of 
 the vocal organs by which the particular sound is produced. 
 Repeat the letter or word again and again, until it can be 
 uttered with accuracy. 
 
 Observation. The drawling method of talking to young 
 children, as well as using words that are not found in any 
 written language, (called hahy talk,) is decidedly wrong. A 
 child will pronounce and understand the application of a cor- 
 rect word £is quickly as an incorrect one. 
 
 320. When foreign bodies, such as cherry-stones, buttons, 
 &c., get into the throat, they cause excessive irritation, and 
 sometimes death. It is not necessary to ascertain which pas- 
 sage the foreign body is in, for the immediate treatment ought 
 in either case to be the same. 
 
 321. Some person should place one hand on the front of 
 the chest of the sufferer, and, with the other, give two or three 
 smart blows upon the back, allowing a few seconds to inter- 
 vene between them. 
 
 Give 2d observation. 318. Does the condition of the throat and nasal 
 passages modify the voice ? 319, Is repetition essential to distinct articu- 
 lation ? What method i suggested in teaching a child to articulate letters 
 cr words ? Give observation. 32). What should be done wherv f >reiga 
 bodies get into he throat ? 
 
ANATOMY OF THE SKIN. 
 
 115 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 33S. The skin is a membranous covering, enveloping the 
 \>*jf\es and other parts of the system. In youth, and in females 
 particularly, it is smooth, soft, and elastic. In middle age, and 
 in inales, it is firm, and rough to the touch. In old age, in 
 pcrAons who are emaciated, and about the flexions of the joints, 
 it M thrown into folds. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE SKIN. 
 
 3J3. The skin of the human body is composed of two 
 layers of membrane, namely, the cu'ti-de^ and the cu'tis vefra^ 
 or true skin. 
 
 324. The cuticle, or that part of the nkin which is seen by 
 the eye, is, at first, a fluid thrown out by the blood-vessels over 
 the internal layer of this membrane. 
 
 325. While layers of this fluid are continually forming 
 on the upper surface of the true skin, the external layers of 
 li.e fluid become dry, and resemble small scales. 
 
 Illustrations. The cuticle is that part of the skin which is 
 raised by a blister. Sometimes from disease, as erysipelas, or 
 fever, it comes off" from the surface of the body in pieces of 
 considerable size. 
 
 322. What is the skin ? Mention its different appearances in its differ- 
 ent conditions in the human frame. 323 — 336. Give the anatomy of the 
 tkin. 323. How many layers of membrane has the skin ? What are they 
 called ? 324. How is the cuticle first formed ? 325. What is the appear 
 tnce of the external layers ? Give illustration. 
 
 w.- 
 
16 
 
 ANATOMV, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HTGIENK. 
 
 326. The arrangement of the cuticle, in difTcrcnt parts of 
 the huriiun body, is worthy of notice. Where feelinj; is most 
 acute, the cuticle is delicate and thin. Where there is motion, 
 as over the joints, it is lax and movable. Where it is in con- 
 stant use, it becomes harder and thicker. 
 
 Illustration. The soleri of the feet and the palms of the 
 hands afford good examples.^ of the cuticle thickened by use. 
 
 327. This part of the skir. has no blood-vessels or nerves ; 
 consequently, a needle may ..e passed under it, to some extent, 
 and cause no pain, nor will iny blood ooze from it. 
 
 Fig. 66. 
 
 Fig. 66. 1, 1, The cuticle. 2, 2, The colored layer of the ciiticlo 4, 4, The iiet- 
 nork of nerves. 5, 5, The true skin. 6, 6, 6, Three nerves that d'"ide to form the 
 net-work, (J, 4.) 
 
 328. The cuticle, when clean, looks like a thii shaving of 
 
 soft, clear horn ; but when filled with dust and other foul 
 matter, it becomes dark-colored. 
 
 Observation. The hair and nails, also the hoofs •'f animals, 
 
 326. Mention the arrangement of the cuticle in different pw:*s of the 
 bndy. What parts of the body afford examples of the cuticle thiclj^ned by 
 ut>e? 327. Has the cuticle blood-vessels or nerves? 328. Wuat i* th* 
 <ener2il appearance of the cuticle? Qire observation. 
 
i,»ll>HI — i"U 11 ■ I ip^p^—t>»^T»-~^»g^r-^»^pi>^H^T^^—^^p»"»^^t^»lw^— ^ 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE SKIN. IH 
 
 are appendages of the skin. They are so connected vntli the 
 cuticle, that by scalding they come off with this tissue- 
 
 329. -^n the inner and newly-formed layers of the . jle, 
 there exists a peculiar kind of paint. This colored layer, in the 
 Negro, is black ; in the hidian, copper-colored ; in t'.ie Euro- 
 pean, It is very light, diflbring, however, in ditlerent persons. 
 
 330. The cutis vera, or true skin, is so called, because 
 it is the most essential of the two layers of the skin. It 
 contains several sets of vessels, namely. Arteries, Veins, and 
 Lijvipliatics. Beside these vessels, there are found both 0*7 
 and Perspiratory (sweat) Glands, and Nerves. 
 
 331. The ARTERIES and veins form a net-work upon the 
 surface of the true skin ; hence, cut any part of this layer of the 
 skin, and it will bleed. By the arteries the skin is nourished. 
 
 Observation. When this layer of the skin is destroyed by 
 cuts or burns, it is never formed again, and produces scars 
 which do not disappear. 
 
 332. The nerves, like the blood-vessels, are very numer- 
 ous, for no part of the skin can be pricked or cut without 
 giving pain. The minute extremities of these nerves, together 
 with the capillary vessels, form small, conical prominences, 
 called pa-pil'lcB. (Fig. 68.) 
 
 Observation. These prominences can be seen in the palm 
 of the hand and sole of the foot. On the ends of the fingers 
 they are curiously arranged ; some in concentric ovals ; others 
 pursue a serpentine course. 
 
 333. The lymphatics are those small vessels which open 
 upon the inner layers of the cuticle. These vessels are called 
 
 329. What is found in the inner and newly-fonmed layers of the cuticle ? 
 What color is it in the Negro ? Indian ? European ? 330. Why is the cutis 
 vera so called ? What does it contain ? What vessels exist in this layer 
 beside the last raer»tioned ? ?31. What do the arteries and veins form 
 upon the true skin i By what vessel is the skin supplied with blood ? 
 What is formed when the true skin is destroyed by cuts or burns? 
 832. What is said of the nerves of the trie Hkin ? How arc the papillae 
 formed ? Where may they be seen ? 333 What are the lymphatics of the 
 »kiu? .,--,- _ „^. 
 
118 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOOY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 into action when ointments are rubbed on the skin ; and also ir 
 vacciiiation, to prevent the small-pox. 
 
 334. The perspiratory apparatus consists of minute tubes, 
 which pass inward through the cuticle, and terminate in the 
 deeper meshes of the truo skin. In their course, each little 
 tube forms a beautiful spiral coil ; and, on arriving at its desti- 
 nation, coils upon itself in such a way as to constitute an ovul- 
 shupcd, or globular ball, called the perspiratory gland. 
 
 335. The oil-glands are small bodies embe Ided 'n the true 
 skin. They connect with the surface of the skin ' y small 
 tubes, which traverse the cuticle. In some pans iheao glands 
 are wanting ; in others, where their office is most needful, they 
 are abundant ; as on the nose, the head, and the ears. 
 
 Fig. 67. 
 
 FiR. 67. 1, 9, 3, Oil-glnnda and tubes from diflerent parts of tlie body. A A, A, 
 Glands. B, B, B, The ducts of these glands. 4, An oil-gland, and tube from th« 
 ■calp. The glands (A) form a cluster around the tube cf the hair, (C.) These ducU 
 open Into the shcatb of the hair, (B.) The figures, from 1 to 4 are roaguifled ib Jty 
 eight diameters. 
 
 Observation. When there is an unnatural ac simulation of 
 oil in the tubes, it producos the " worm," or " grub." 
 
 834. Of what does the perspiratory apparatus consist ? 335. Uescrib« 
 the oil-glands. What is said of thoir distributi;>n ? Explain fig. 67 
 What does an unnatural accumulation uf this oily matter produce i 
 
 HMiiiilii 
 
mrsioLoav or the skin 119 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE SKIN. 
 
 336. The skin invests the whole of the external surface of 
 the body, following all its prominences and curves, and gives 
 protection to all the organs it encloses, while each of its several 
 parts has a distinct use. 
 
 337. The cuticle is insensible, and serves as a sheath of pro- 
 tection to the highly sensitive skir. (cutis vera) situated beneath 
 It. The latter feels; but the former blunts the impression 
 which occasions feeling. 
 
 338. The cuticle, also, prevents disease, by impeding the 
 evaporation of the fluids of the true skin, and the absorption of 
 the poisonous vapors, which necessarily attend various employ- 
 ments. It, however, affords protection to the system only when 
 unbroken, and then to the greatest degree, when covered with 
 a proper amount of oily secretion from tlie oil-glands. 
 
 339. The nerves of the skin ure the organs of the sense of 
 touch and feeling. Through them we receive many impressions 
 that increase our pleasures ; as, the grateful sensations imparted 
 by the cooling breeze in a warm day. In consequence of their 
 sensitiveness, we are individually protected, by being warned 
 of the nearness of destructive agents. 
 
 340. A large proportion of the waste of the body passes 
 through the outlets of the skin; s^int portions in the form of 
 oil, others in the form of watery vapor and carbonic acid. 
 
 336—346. Give the physiology of the skin. 336. What is said of the skin ? 
 887. Mention a function of the catirle. 338. Give another use of the 
 euticle. 339 Of wnat use are the nervf s of the skin ? 340. Through 
 what membrane does a large proportion of the waste atoms of the body pass ^ 
 
120 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY. AND HYfilKNE. 
 
 341. llie oily fluid with which tlie skin is bedewed, is sepa- 
 rated from the blood by means of the oil-glands. This secre- 
 tion is spread over those parts of the skin most exposed to the 
 changes of temperature and moisture. The action of these 
 glands rendfHs the skin soft, and it is also one source by which 
 the blood is purified. 
 
 342. The perspiratory glands separate from the blood tho 
 perspiration, or sweat. There are more than two thousand of 
 these glands, v,'ith ducts, in every square inch of skin, and more 
 than five million of them in this natural covering of the body. 
 
 Fig. 68. 
 
 Fig. 1)8. 1, 1, The lines or ridges of the cuticle, cut perpendicularly. 2, 'i, 2, 2, 2, The 
 ftirrows or wrinkles of the same. 3, The cuticle. 4, 4, The colored layer of th« 
 cuticle. 5, 5, The culis vera. 6, G, 6, fi, 6, Tl'o papilte, each of which ansv.'era to 
 the lines on the ex'yrnal surface of the skin. 7, 7, Small fu:-rowa between the pa- 
 pilltB, 8, 8, 8, 8, The deeper furrows between each couple of the ;>!ipilItD. 9, 9, l^ells 
 filled wit!< fat. 10, 10, 10, The adipose layer, with numerous fat vesicles. 19, Two 
 hairs 13, A perspiratory gland, with its spiral duct. '4, Another perspirator>' gland, 
 with a duct less spiral. 15, 15, Oil-glands with ducts opening into the sheath of th« 
 hair, (12.) 
 
 341. Wliat is the use of the oil-glands ? 342. What is the use of the 
 perspiratory ghinds ? How mauy of these glauds with ducts upon every 
 square inch of skin f 
 
PHTSIOLOaY OF THE SKIN. 121. 
 
 343. In hialth, these glands are in constant action, and the 
 skin is moist. When this moisture cannot be seen, it is called 
 insensible perspiration. When it can be seen in drops, it in 
 called sensible perspiration. 
 
 Experiment. Put the hand into a cold, dry, glass jar, or any 
 glass vessel, and wind arou: r the wrist and mouth of the jar a 
 handkerchief. In a few minutes, the inside of the jar will be 
 covered with moisture from the hand. 
 
 344. The function of these gl!\n<ls is very necessary to 
 health. During twenty-four hours, from twenty to thirty ounces 
 of waste, useless matter pusses out of the body by these ducts, 
 or through the pores of the skin. 
 
 345. If perspiration is suppressed from disorder of the skin 
 or cold, the whole of this injurious matter is circulated through 
 the system by the blood, disturbing the action of the lungs, 
 stomach, and other organs. 
 
 346. Many cases of chronic coughs, headache, dyspepsia, 
 and diarrhoea, originate in this way. If any one organ of tno 
 system has been weakened, this organ is more susceptible of 
 disease than others. Ji persons whose lungs are weak or 
 diseased, a chill will immediately cause an irritation and often 
 inflammation of these organs. If an individual is predisposed 
 to stiffness of the joints and rheumatic pains, a chill will affect 
 these diseased parto. 
 
 343. When is perspiration called insensible ? When ser siblc ? 344. How 
 many ounces of waste matter pass through the skin in twenty-four hours ? 
 "'''^5. What is the effect if perspiration is " checked " ? 34<J. What is the 
 result if any oigz-u of the body is weakened or diseased ? 
 
 Note. Let the anatomy and physiology of the skin be reviewed from 
 fig. es. or froao anatomical outline plate 9. 
 
 u 
 
122 ANATOMY^ FHlSIOLOtY, AND BTG1£N1. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE SKIN. 
 
 347. The sensibility of the skin, and the activity of the oil 
 and perspiratory glands, are modified by the condition of the 
 cuticle, the temperature of the skin and body, the purity and 
 warmth of the air, and the character of tba light to which the 
 body is exposed. 
 
 348. To maintain a healthy action of every part r is 
 membrane, attention to clothing, bathing, light., c ad air, ^ of 
 great practical importance. 
 
 349. Clothing, in itself, does not bestow heat, but is chiefly 
 useful in preventing the escape of heat from the body, and in 
 defending it from the temperature of the atmosphere. In select- 
 hig and applying clothing to our persons, the following sugges- 
 tions should be observed. 
 
 350. The material for clothing should be a bad conductor of 
 heat ; tha i is, it should have little tendency to conduct, or remove 
 heat from the body. This depends on the property possessed 
 by the material in retaining atmospheric air in its meshes. 
 
 351. Moisture renders clothing a good conductor of heat 
 Thus all articles of apparel should not only be non-conductors 
 of heat, but should not possess the property of absorbing and 
 retammg moisture. 
 
 347—373. Give the hygient of the akin. 347. "What influences modify 
 the action of the oil and perspiratory glands ? 348. To what must atten« 
 tion be given to maintain a healthy action of the skin ? 349. Does clothing 
 bestow heat ? What is its use ? 350. Mention a property that the vnaterial 
 for clothing should possess ? 351. What property in the selection of 
 elothing should we aroid? 
 
"'M».^ii ). p,w*Li ■ "^ T^TT ■Mi'rT ;irT»^'T"^T^^v^' ^ ' 
 
 HYGIENE OF ?HE SKIN. 123 
 
 352. Woollen cloth retains more a'r in its meshes ihdii any 
 other article except furs, and it absorbs but very little moisture. 
 Consequently, it is an excellent article for clothing. 
 
 353. Cotton contains less air in its meshes than woollen, but 
 much more than linen. In texture, it is smoother than wool, 
 and less liable to irritate the skin. This fabric absorbs moisture 
 in a small degree. In all respects, it is well adapted for gar- 
 ments worn next the skin. 
 
 354. The clothing should be of a porous character. The 
 skin is not only an important agent in separating from the blood 
 those impurities that otherwise would oppress the system and 
 occasion death, but it exercises great influence in respiration. 
 Consequently, the apparel should be made of a material that 
 will permit the air to pass through its meshes. 
 
 355. Thi clothing should be not only porous^ but fitted 
 loosely. The garments should retain a layer of air between 
 them and the body. Every one is practically aware that a 
 loose dress is much warmer than one which fits closely ; that 
 a loose glove, boot or shoe, afford greater warmth than those of 
 smaller dimensions. 
 
 356. More clothing is necessary when a vital organ is 
 diseased. When vital organs, as the lungs, heart, «Sic., are 
 diseased, less heat is generated in the body. For this reason, 
 in consumption, dyspepsia, and even headache, the skin is pale 
 and the extremities cold. 
 
 357. Mfire clothing is required in the evening than during 
 the day. In the evening we have less vital energy, and, there- 
 fore, less heat is generated in the system, than in the early part 
 of the day ; beside, the atmosphere is damp, the skin has 
 become moist from perspiration, and heat, in consequence, ia 
 rapidly removed from the body. For this reason, when re« 
 
 352. Give the properties of woollen cloth. 353. What are the quali- 
 ties of cotton as an articlo of dress ? 3.54. Why should 4he material for 
 clothing he porous ? 3.55. W hy should garments be fitted loosely ? 
 8.56. Why do we need more clothing when the lungs or brain is diseased? 
 867. Why uo we need more clothing in the eveniuij than during the day ? 
 
. .. JJWJfJWi 
 
 124 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, ANI' HYGIENE. 
 
 turning from crowded assemblies, we should be provided with 
 an extra garment. 
 
 358. A person of active habits requires less clothing tha* 
 one of sedentary employments ; for exercise increases the cir 
 culation of the blood, which is always attended with the disen 
 gagcment of a greater quantity of heat; consequently, an 
 increase of warmth is felt throughout the system. 
 
 359. An excessive^ as well as an insufficient, amount of 
 clothing is alike injurious. The custom of wearing an undue 
 amount on some parts of the body, and leaving exposed the 
 arms and upper part of the chest, cannot be too highly 
 censured. 
 
 360. The clothing should he kept clean. No article of ap- 
 parel is entirely free from absorption ; even wool and cotton 
 possess it in a small degree. They take up a portion of the 
 perspired fluids, and thus the fibres of the cloth become covered 
 with the waste matter contained in the perspiration. A neglect 
 of a frequent change of apparel, is one cause of disease with 
 many pei*sons, particularly the poorer classes in the community. 
 
 361. The clothing in which loe sleeps as well as beds and 
 bed-clothes, should be aired every day. If this is not done, the 
 moist bedding will cause a chill, and the perspired matter may 
 be carried into the system of the next occupant. Many dis- 
 eases are thus contracted. 
 
 362. When the clothing has become wet, it is best to change 
 it immediately. The skin should then be nibbed with a dry, 
 crash towel, until reaction, indicated by redness, is produced. 
 If the garments are not changed, the person should exercise 
 moderately, so that sufficient heat may continue to be generated 
 in the system to dry the clothing and skin without a chill. 
 
 358, Why does the active lahorer require less clothing than a person of 
 sedentary employment ? 3;39, Is too much as well as too little clothing 
 injurious ? 360. Why should the clothing be kept clean ? What arises 
 from neglect of a frequent change of apparel ? 361. Why should beds and 
 bed-clothes that arc used be aired everv day ? 302. What ia neoessaxy 
 when the clothing has become wet 
 
HYGIENE OF THE SKIN LA» 
 
 ^3. Changes of dress^from thick to thin^ should always he 
 made in the mornings for then the vital powers are in full play. 
 Sudden changes in wearing apparel, as well as in food and 
 general habits, are attended with hazard ; and this is propor- 
 tionate to the weakness or exhaustion of the body when the 
 change is J^ade. 
 
 364. Kathing is necessary, in order that the perspirable 
 matter may pass freely through the " pores" of the skin. 
 The whole body should be bathed frequently, as perspira- 
 tion is not confined to the face and hands. 
 
 365. Cold water — or water at about seventy degrees in 
 summer, and eighty degrees in winter — is more strengthening 
 to the system than water that is warmer. 
 
 366. No person should bathe when the body is fatigued, 
 either by mental or physical labor, or immediately after a 
 meal. The best time for bathing, particularly for sick per- 
 sons, is about two hours after breakfast. Persons in hcallii 
 may bathe in the morning, or in the evening. 
 
 367. The sponge bath is, perhaps, the simplest and best 
 method of bathing. In this but a small portion of the surface 
 of the skin is exposed to the air, and the brisk rubbing that 
 immediately follows the wet sponge, prevents a chiil of the 
 skin. No colds would be contracted in bathing, if persons 
 .vould wipe dry, and use friction with a coarse towel or flesh- 
 brush, until redness or warmth of the skin is produced. 
 
 368. The air is an agent of importance in the functions of 
 the skin. It imparts to this membrane oxygen, and receives 
 from it carbonic acid. It also removes from it a large portion 
 of the perspiration and the more fluid portions /)f the oily mat- 
 ter. In order that the air may accomplish these ends, it is 
 
 363. When should changes in Jresa from thick to thin be made ? Why ? 
 864. What is said of the necessity of bathing ? 36.5. What temperature of 
 water is best for the system ? 3G6. When should persons not bathe ? 
 When is the best time for b...tiing? 367. What method is the simplest 
 for bathing ? How are colds prevented when bathing ? 368. What is said 
 of the influerce of the air on the functions of tte skin ? 
 
 . .^ 11 ♦ , . 
 
12'> ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOG\ iWD HYGIENE. 
 
 neiessary that it come in contact with the body. This is one 
 of the many reasons why we sliould wear loose and porous 
 clothing. 
 
 3H9. LiRHT exercises a salutary inPuence upon the skin. 
 Thus wo see, that those individuals who labor in low, damp, 
 dark rooms, are pale and sickly. The light, permeating the 
 skin, not only exercises a salutary influence upon this mem- 
 brane, but upon the blood, and, through this fluid, upon tho 
 whole system. 
 
 370. This established fact shows how important it is that 
 school-houses, mechanics' shops, kitchens, and sitting-rooms, 
 be not only well ventilated, but favorably situated to receive 
 light. For the same reasons, the kitchen and the sitting-room, 
 which are the apartments most used by ladies, should be se- 
 lected from the most pleasant and well-lighted rooms in the 
 house. 
 
 371. When any portion of the skin has been frozen, apply 
 ice, snow, or cold water. The fire and a warm room should 
 be avoided. If the frozen parts blister, treat them as you 
 would burns. 
 
 372. In scalds and burns, when there is no blister, or if one 
 is formed, and the external skin is not broken, apply cold water, 
 as Lng as the smarting pain continues. After the pain has 
 subsided, cover the blistered part with a patch of cotton or linen 
 cloth, on which is spread lard and bees-wax. 
 
 373. If the external skin is removed, apply lime-walei 
 mixed with "sweet oil," fresh cream, or lard and bees-wax. 
 When the dressings are applied, they should not be removed 
 until they become dry and hard. 
 
 369. Show the effect of light on the skin. 370. What is said of the se- 
 lection of those rooms that are the most used? 371. What should ue 
 applied when th9 skin is frozen? What should be avoided? 372. In 
 scalds or burns, what is necessary if a blister is formed ? 373. What la 
 necessary if the oxte-nal skin is removed? How often should the dre»» 
 lings be removed ? 
 
 
ANATOMY OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 127 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
 
 374. In the precediug chapters, the structure and use of the 
 bones and muscles have been explained, the process by which 
 the food is converted into chyle and mixed with the blood, 
 together with the manner by which this fluid is conveyed to 
 every part of the body, has been described. 
 
 375. It has also been shown, that lymphatic aosorption com- 
 mences as soon as nutrition is completed, and conveys the 
 useless, worn-out particles of the different parts back into the 
 circulating fluid ; while the respiratory organs and secretory 
 glands perform the work of preparing the waste atoms to be 
 conveyed from the body. These functions must succeed each 
 other in proper order ; and such is the mutual dependence of 
 these processes, that a medium of communication is necessary 
 from one organ to another. This is effected by means of the 
 Nervous System. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
 
 376. The nervous system is composed of the Brain^ 
 Cranial Nerves, Spinal Cord, Spinal Nerves, and the Sym- 
 pathetic Nerve. 
 
 377. The brain is a pulpy organ v.^ithin the skull-bones. 
 The upper and front portion is called the Cer'e-brum. The 
 lower portion, situated at the back part of the skull, is callt^d 
 the Cer-e-bel'lum. 
 
 874. "What has heen described in the preceding chapters? 375. Wlat 
 has also been shown ? 376 — 388. Give the anatomy of the nervous system 
 376. Of what is the nenrous system composed ? 377. Describe the brain 
 
J2b 
 
 ANATOMY, rilVSIOLOGV, AND IITQIENB. 
 
 378. The cerebrum, or larger portion of the brain, is com 
 posed of a whitish suhstancc, with an irregular border of gray 
 matter around its edges. 
 
 379. The cerebellum is also composed of white and gray 
 matter, but the latter constitutes the largest portion. The white 
 matter is so arranged, that when cut vertically, the appearance 
 of tba trunk and branches of a tree {ar'hor vi'ta) is presented 
 
 Fig. 6'?. 
 
 Fig 69. a, a, The scalp turned down. A, h, b, The cut ed^es of the bones cf Ilia 
 Hkiill. c, Tbe external membrane of the brain suspended by a hook, d, The left 8ia<; 
 of the brain, showing its convolutions. 
 
 380. The brain is surrounded by three membranes. The 
 external membrane is thick and firm ; the middle membrane is 
 thin, and looks somewhat like a spider's web ; the inner mem* 
 brane consists of a net-work of blood-vessels. 
 
 378, Describe the cerebrum. 379. Describe the cerebellum. 380. Wbat 
 is taid of the membranes of the brain ? What does fig. 69 represent ? 
 
ANATOMY OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
 
 1211 
 
 381. On removing the upj)er part of the sku.l-honcs and 
 f^einbranes, the brain presents an undulating, folded appear- 
 ance. These ridges are called con-vo-lu'tions. 
 
 382. The spinal cord is composed of a whitish substance, 
 similar to that of the brain. It is covered with a sheath, or 
 membrane, and extends from the brain tli rough the whole 
 length of the spinal column. The upper portion, within tlw» 
 filiull-bones, is called the me-duVla oh-lon-ga'ta. 
 
 Fig. 70. 
 
 Fig. 70. A section of the brain and spinal cord, showing the relation of the cmntaJ 
 nerves to these organs. 1, The cerebrum. 2, Tlie cerebellum, with its arbor vitM 
 rtpresfnted. 3, The medulla oblongata. 4, The spinal cord. 6 The first pair, ot 
 nerve of smell. 7, The second pair, or nerve of siglit. 9, 10, 12, The third, fourth, 
 and sixth pairs of nerves. Tlicse pass to the muscles of the eye. II, The fiflh pair, 
 cr nerve of taste, and also the sensitive nerve of the teeth. 13, i'he seventh pair 
 This passes to the muscles of the face. 14, The eighth pair, or nerve of hearing 
 15, 16, 18, 19, The ninth, tenth, eleventh and twelfth pairs. These pass to th*. tODgu«, 
 larynx, and neck. 20, Two spinal nerves. ^ 
 
 381. What is the appearance of the brain when the skull-bones anJ n»era« 
 branes are removed ? What are they called ? 382. Describe the spinal 
 oord. What is the medulla oblongata ? Explain fig. 70. 
 
130 
 
 ANATCMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 383. The nerves are small, while cords, that pass from the 
 biain and spinal cord. They are distributed to ev^ ;y part of 
 the human system. 
 
 38-4. The ckanial nerves, that connect with the base of the 
 brain, are arranged in twelve pairs. Tliey are generally dis- 
 tributed to the parts about the face. 
 
 385. The spinal nerves, that connect with the spinal cord, 
 are arranged in thirty-one pairs, each arising by two roots ; uu 
 anterior, or motor root ;, and a posterior, or sensitv^e root. 
 
 Fig. 71. A, The spinal cord, surrounded by its sheath, (E, E.) B, A spinal nerve, 
 foriiied by the union of the motor rixit, (C,) and the sensitive root, (D.) At D, th« 
 gaiiglioM, or linot, upon tliis root is seen. 
 
 38G. Every nerve, however small, contains two distinct cords 
 of nervous matter. One gives feeling, while the other is used 
 in the motion of the part to which they are distributed. 
 
 ^•^T. The SYMPATiiKTic nerve consists of a series of 
 ^' .„gli-ay or knots, extending each side of the spinal column, 
 forming a chain its whole length. It communicates with both 
 the cranial and spinal nerves, and likewise distributes branchen 
 to all the intc' nal organs. 
 
 383. What are nerves? 384. What is said of the cranial nerves? 
 385. "What is said respecting the spinal nerves ? 386. What does every 
 aerre contala ? Describe fig. 71. 387. Describe the sympathetic nerve. 
 
rRTAIOLOGY OF THE NERVOUS SYUTEM 131 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM 
 
 388. The brain is the organ of the mind. To the cc^bnim, 
 01 large brain, the facuhies of thinkings memory^ and the will, 
 arc ascribed. In the human body, this part of the bmin extends 
 so far backward as to cover the whole of the cerebellum. To 
 the cerebellum, or little brain, is ascribed the seat of the animal^ 
 or loicer propensities. 
 
 389. The brain is the seat of sensation. It perceives tho 
 impressions made on all parts of the body, through the medium 
 of the sensitive nerves. That the impressions of external 
 objects, made on these nerves, be communicated to the brain, 
 where sensation is perceived, it is necessary that they be not 
 diseased or injured. 
 
 390. There is a plain distinction between sensations and im- 
 pressions ; the latter are the changes produced in the extremiiies 
 of the nerve ; the former, the changes produced in the brain 
 and communicated to the mind. 
 
 391. What part of the brain receives the impressions, or has 
 the most intimate relation with the intellectual faculties, is un- 
 known. Some portions, however, are of greater importance 
 than others. Pif;ces of both the white and gray matter, have 
 been removed by injuries without impairing the intellect or 
 destroying life. 
 
 388—394. Give the Junctions of the brain. 388. "What is said of the brain ? 
 What is ascribed to the cerebrum ? To the cerebellum ? 389. Wherr i« 
 sensation peiceived ? Through what medium are the impressions of exter- 
 nal objects conveyed to the brain ? 390. What is the difference between 
 oenaations and impressions? 391. Is it known what part of the brain kM 
 the most intimate relation with the intellectual faculties i 
 
182 ANATOMY, PJIYSIOLOGY, AND HYQIENK. 
 
 392. This or^aii, ullhough it tukes cogni/ruicc of every sen* 
 Ballon, is, of itself, but slightly sensible. It may be cut oi 
 removed wilhout pain, and the individual, at tlie satne time, 
 retain his consciousue^s. The medulla oblongata, unlike the 
 brain, ia highly s'.;nsitive ; if slightly punctured, convulsions 
 follow ; if much injured, respiration, or breathings immediately 
 ceases 
 
 393 The brain is the seat of the vnll. The contraction, or 
 TiKivernent of the muscles, is caused by an influence sent from 
 the brain by the act of the mind, or the will. The medium of 
 communication from this organ to tlio muscles, is the motor 
 nerves. If the brain is in a state of repose, the muscles are at 
 rest; if, by an act of the will, the brtiin sends a portion of 
 nervous influence to a muscle, it immediately ci.iiracts, and 
 those parts to which the muscle is attached, move. 
 
 394. The sympathetic nerve, although it confers, neither 
 Bensibility nor power of movement, yet it gives vitality, or life, 
 to all the important parts of the system. Every portion of the 
 body is, to a certain extent, under its influence, as filaments 
 from this system of nerves accompany the blood-vessels through- 
 out their course. This establislies a union, or sympathy, with 
 the dilTerent organs of the body. 
 
 Uluslralion. When the brain is jarred by a blow, nausea 
 an<l vomiting follow. Again, when food is taken that irritates the 
 nerves of the stomacii, it produces headache, from the sympathy 
 of the brain with the stomach, through this system of nerves. 
 
 Pig. 72. A back view of the brain and spinal cord. 1, The cerebrum. 2, Ths 
 cerebellum. 3, The spiiiai cord. 4, Nervea of the face. 5, The brachial plexus, or 
 Huiiiu of nerves. 6, 7, 8, 9, Nerves of the arm. 10, Nerves i\\^„ pass ureter the ribs. 
 11, The lumbar plexus of nervea. 12, The aacral plexus of nervea. l' 14, 1$, 16, 
 Nervea of the lower limba. 
 
 392. What is said of the sensibility of this organ ? Of the medulla 
 oblongata ? 393. Describe how the contraction of a muscle is effected. 
 294. What is said of the sympathetic nerve ? Explain fig. 72. 
 
 Note. Let the anatomy and physiology of the nervous systeit be re 
 newed from fig. 72, or anatomical outline plate 8. 
 
IMATOMT or run NKUVOUS BVaXUM 
 
 133 
 
 Fig. 72. 
 
IS4 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 
 
 395. As the different organs of the system are dependent on 
 l/je brain and spinal cord for efficient functional action, and as 
 the mind and brain are closely connected during life, the former 
 acting in strict obedience to the laws which regulate the latter, 
 it becomes an object of great importance in education to dis- 
 cover what these laws are, and escape the numerous evils con- 
 sequent on their violation. 
 
 396. For healthy and efficient action^ the brain should Jc, 
 primarily^ sound ; as this organ is subject to the same general 
 laws as other parts of the body. If the brain of the child is 
 free from defects at birth, and acquires no improper impressions 
 m infancy, it will not easily become diseased in after life. 
 
 397. The brain requires a due supply of jmre blood. It is 
 estimated that one teuth of all the blood sent from the heart 
 goes to this organ. If the arterial blood be altogether vv^ith- 
 drawn, or a person breathes air that is filled with carbonic gas, 
 the brain ceases its proper action, and sensibility with con- 
 sciousness become extinct. The effects of slight differences in 
 the quality of the blood upon the action of the brain, are not so 
 easily recognized. 
 
 Illustration. Let a person remain, for a time, in a crowded, 
 ill-ventilated hall or ch -ch, and headache or faintness is gen- 
 emlly produced. This is caused by the action of impure blood 
 upon the brain. 
 
 89o — 408. Give the hygiene of the nervous system. 39.5. Why is it im- 
 portant to know the laws which regulate the action of the brain ? 396. "V\^^a♦ 
 is necessary that ihe action of the brain be healthy s.r\d efficient ? 397. Why 
 does the brai;j require a due supply of pure blood i How is th^ Ulu»> 
 trated> 
 
HYGIENE OF THE NERVOUS Si'STEM. 135 
 
 Ohservalion. if a school-teacher wishes to have his pupils, 
 on the day of examination, appear creditably, he will bo care- 
 ful to have the room well ventilated. Ventilating churches 
 might prevent the inattention and sleepiness that are observed 
 during the afternoon sorvice. 
 
 398. Tlie brain should be called into action. This organ, 
 like the muscles, should be used, and then allowed to rest, or 
 cease from vigorous thought. When the brain is properly 
 called into action by moderate study, it increases in size and 
 strength ; while, on the other hand, if it is not used, the action 
 of this organ is enfeebled, thereby diminishing the function of 
 all parts of the body. 
 
 399. The number of hours that the brain should be vigor- 
 ously used, depends on its development, and the general 
 he'ilth of the body. The child with a large brain and an active 
 mind, should not be induced to pursue studies above the 
 capacity of children generally. On the other hand, children 
 of sluggish minds, particularly if they have good health, should 
 be incited to study. 
 
 400. Excessive and continued mental exertion is injurious 
 at any time of life ; but in infancy and early youth, when the 
 structure of the brain is still immature and delicate, permanent 
 injury is more easily produced by incorrect treatment than al 
 nny subsequent period. 
 
 Observation. It is no unusual occurrence, that on " 'xam- 
 ination day," the best scholars appear indiflerently. Th's. is 
 the result of riervous exhaustion, produced by extra mental 
 effort in preparing for the final examination. Such pupils 
 should divert their ninds from study, for a few days previous 
 to examination. During this time, indulge in light read'ng and 
 physical recreation. 
 
 Give a practical observation. 39.S. AVHiy slioiild the brain be called into 
 tction ? What is the effect if the brain is not used ? 399. How long should 
 the brain be actively used ? What is said respecting the child fith a large 
 brain? Those of sluggish minds ? 4(J0. When is excessive and continued 
 mental exeTtion particularly injurious ? Give observation. 
 
136 ANATOMY, I'HYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 401. We should not enter upon continued mental exertion^ 
 or arouse deep feelings immediately after a full meal. Such 
 is the connection between the mind and body, that even in a 
 perfectly heahhy person, unwelcome news, sudden anxiety, or 
 mental excitement, occurring soon after eating, will impede 
 digestion, and cause the stomach to loathe the masticated food. 
 
 402. We should engage in intense study in the early part 
 of the day. Studies that require close application shouid ae 
 pursued in the morning. The evening should be devoted to 
 entertaining conversation, music, and light reading. This will 
 fit the system of the student for quiet and refreshing sleeo. 
 
 Observation. The idea of gathering wisdom by burning the 
 " midnight oil " is more poetical than profitable The best time 
 to use the brain is during the day. 
 
 403. Those whose employment is arduous, and the groioing 
 childy need more sleep than the idler or the adult. As sleep is 
 the natural repose of all organs, it follows that the more all the 
 organs of the system are employed, the more repose they 
 require The organs of the child, beside sustaining their proper 
 functions, are busy in promoting its growth. This nutritive 
 process is attended with a certain degree of exhaustion. 
 
 404. The condition of the brain is modified by changing 
 the action of the mind. If we think intensely of a subject, 
 the face will become flushed, and dizziness or pain of the 
 head will be induced. Change our thoughts to something 
 of a more trifling character, and these peculiar sensations 
 will cease. 
 
 405. The brain can exercise its full power vvon only one 
 object at a time. If its energies are directed to two oi more 
 opemtions, neither will receive that full power of exertion that 
 It would, if only one object had engaged the mind. 
 
 401. Why should we not arouse deep feeling immediately after a full 
 meal ? 402. When should we engage in intense study ? Give observation. 
 403. What persons require the most sleep ? 404. Show how the action of 
 the mind modifies the condition of the brain. 405. Why cannot tne biaia 
 exercise its full powers on more than one object at a time ? 
 
HTGIENE OP THE NERVOUS SYSTEM. 13^ 
 
 406. Regularity is of great importance in calling the hrain 
 into action. Let us take our dinner at a certain hour for m v- 
 eral successive weeks, and we at last find our appetites indi- 
 cating its approach with the greatest regularity. The same is 
 true of the nervous system ; call it into action at regular periods, 
 and without previous thought, we enter upon that mode of 
 action when the time approaches. The formation of " habits " 
 are promoted by this principle. 
 
 407. Repetition is necessary to make a durable imvression 
 on the mind. Repetition of mental action is as important aa 
 repetition of muscul'^r action. It is by this means that thoughts 
 are durably impressed upon the brain. This principle has been 
 too much neglected in the moral and intellectual education of 
 children. 
 
 408. !n injuries of the brain, the person is generally insen- 
 sible, the extremities are pale and cold, the pulse feeble, and 
 the breathing is less frequent and full. When these symptoms 
 exist, the patient should be placed in pure air. Friction, with 
 dry warmth, should be applied to the extremities, to restore 
 proper circulation in the blood-vessels. There should be no 
 bleeding until the skin of the extremities becomes warm. 
 
 406. Should the brain be called into action at regular periods ? 407. Why 
 is repetition of mental action necessary ? 408. What is the effect on the 
 system when the brain is injured ? What is necessary to be done when 
 Buoh lymptoms exist? 
 
 12 • 
 
138 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX. 
 
 SENSE OF TOUCH. 
 
 409 Sensation is an impression made upon the mind 
 through the medium of the senses. There are five senses, 
 namely, Touchy Taste, Smell, Hearing, and Vision. 
 
 410. Touch is the sense that enables us to tell whether a 
 body is rough or smooth, cold or hot, sharp or blunt. This 
 sense and feeling reside in the nerves of the skin. 
 
 411. The nerves that contribute to the sense of touch, pro- 
 ceed from the anterior half of the spinal cord. Where sensa- 
 tion is most acute, we find th . greatest number of nervous 
 filaments, and those of the largest size, as at the ends of the 
 fingers and lips. 
 
 Observation. The sense of touch varies in different persons, 
 and also in individuals of different ages. Thus the sensibilities 
 of the child are rrnore acute than those of the adult. 
 
 412. This sense is modified by the condition of the braui 
 and nerves , by the quantity and quality of the blood supplied 
 to the skin ^ by the thickness of the cuticle ; and by cultivation. 
 
 Ohsenmtion. Blind persons, by whom the beauties of the 
 external world cannot be seen, cultivate this sense to such a 
 degree that they can distinguish objects with great accuracy ; 
 and the rapidity with which they read books prepared for their 
 use, is a convincing proof of the niceness and extent to which 
 the cultivation of this sense can be carried. 
 
 409. Through what medium are sensations received ? Name the senses. 
 410 — 412. \VJuit is said of the sense of touch f 410. What is touch? 
 411. Why is sensation acute at the ends of the fingeis and lips? What 
 Is said respecting the sense of touch in different persons ? 412. What 
 modify this sense ? What is said of blind persons ? 
 
SENSE OF TASTB. 
 
 139 
 
 SENSE OF TASTE. 
 
 413. Taste is \he sense by which ws perceive the flavor or 
 relish of a thing. The tongue is the principal organ of taste, 
 though the sides of the cheeks, and upper part of the throat, 
 snare in this function. 
 
 414. The surface of the tongue is thickly studded with 
 papillae, or points ; these give this organ a velvety appearance. 
 
 To these points the gust'a-to-ry, or nerve of taste, is distributed. 
 
 • 
 
 Fig. 73. 
 
 Pig. 73. The distribution of the fifth pair of nerves. 1, The orbit for the ey 
 9, The upper Jaw. 3, The tongue. 4, The lower jaw. 5, Tlie fifth pair of nerves 
 6, The first branch of tliis nerve, that passes tt the eye. 9, 10, 11, 19, 13, 14, Divi* 
 ions of this branch. 7, The second branch that p.tsses to tlie teeth of the tipper Jaw 
 J.*, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, Divisions of this branch. 8, Tlie third branch that is distributed 
 to the tongue and teeth of the lower jaw. 33, The division of (his branch, callea 
 g\j;tatory, 24, The division that is distributed to the teeth of the lower jaw. 
 
 4l<3 — 419. What is said respecting the sense of taste f 413. Define taste. 
 What is the principal organ of taste ? 414. Where is the nerve of taata 
 distributed ? Explain fig. 73. 
 
l-tO ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 Observation. By applying strong acids, as vinegar, to the 
 tongue, with a hair-pencil, these points will become curiously 
 lengthened. 
 
 415. Substances, to be tasted, nnust be either naturally fluid, 
 or partially dissolved by the saliva. When fluids are taken into 
 the n\outh the papillas dilate and erect themselves, and the 
 particular sensation excited is carried to the brain by the nerve 
 of taste. But if dry, solid food is taken, it must be acted upon 
 by the saliva before the impression is perceived. 
 
 416. The use of taste is to guide men and animals in the se- 
 lection of their food, and to warn ihem against the introduction 
 of injurious articles into the stomach. This sense lias been made 
 to vaiy more than any other by the refinements of social life. 
 
 417. The Indian's like or dislike to particular kinds of food, 
 generally extends to every person of the same tribe ; but among 
 civilized men, no two individuals can be found alike in all their 
 tastes. 
 
 418. This sense is modified by habit, and not unfrequenily 
 those articles which at first were disgusting, become highly 
 agreeable, by persevering in the use of them ; as in learning to 
 chew tobacco, &c. 
 
 419. Taste, as well as touch, may be improved in acuteness. 
 Those persons whose business leads them to judge of the quality 
 of an article by their taste, can discriminate shades of flavor 
 not perceivable by ordinary persons. Epicures, and tasters of 
 wines and teas, afford examples. 
 
 Observation. Many persons impair their taste by bad habits, 
 as chewing or smoking tobacco, and using stimulating drinks, 
 &c. These indulgences lessen the sensibility of the nerve, and 
 destroy the natural relish for food. 
 
 How can these points upon the tongue be seen ? 415. How must sub- 
 stances be, in order to be tasted ? Show how the taste of substances ia 
 perceived by the brain, 416. What is the use of taste ? What is said of 
 the difference among persons as regards taste ? 418. What effect has habit 
 on this sense ? 419. What effect has cultivation ? Give illustrative er- 
 unplefl. How may the taste be impaired ? 
 
'-T"T7'"^^^n7"'''^*'*^'''"*'r7"r 
 
 SENSE OF SMELL. 
 
 14J 
 
 SENSE OF SMELL. 
 
 420. Smell is the sense that enables us to discern the odor, 
 or scent, of a thing. This sense is located in the air passages 
 of the nose. 
 
 421. The air passages, or nostrils, are lined by mucous 
 membrane, which is continuous with the skin exte/nally, and 
 with the lining membrane of othor cavities which communicate 
 with theni. To this membrane the ol-facl'o-ry^ or nerve of 
 smell, is distributed. 
 
 422. To protect the delicate filaments of the nerve of smell, 
 thus freely exposed to the air and to the painful stimulus of 
 sharp, pungent odors, the membrane is kept constantly moisi 
 by a fluid secreted by the glands, with which it is provided. 
 
 Fig. 74. 
 
 Fig. 74. A side view of the passages or the nostrils, and Hie distribution of the first 
 bdir of nerves. 4, The olfactory nerve 5, The fine and curious divisions of this 
 nerve on the membrane of the nose. 
 
 423. When substances are presented to the nose, the air 
 that is passing through the nostrils brings the odoriferous parti- 
 
 420—427. TMiat is said in reference to smell f 420. What is smell ? Wher? 
 is this sense located? 421. Describe the air passages of the nose. 422. How 
 are the filaments of the nerve of smell protected from pungent odors ? 
 Wliat does fig. 74 represent ? 42ii. llow is the odor of substance9 carried 
 to the brain ? 
 
142 ANATOMF, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 cle8 of matter in contact with the filaments of tlie nerve of 
 smell, that are spread upon the membrane that lines the air 
 passages, and the impression is then carried to the brain. 
 
 424. This sense is closely connected with that of taste, and 
 aids man, as well as the inferior animals, in selecting proper 
 food. It also gives us pleasure by the inhalation of agreeable 
 odors. 
 
 425. The sense of smell, like taste and touch, may be im- 
 proved by cultivation. Thus the North American Indians can 
 easily distinguish different tribes, and different persons of lie 
 same tribe, by the odor of their bodies. 
 
 426. This sense is seen to be remarkably acute in the dog ; 
 he will trace his master's footsteps through thickly-crowded 
 streets, and distinguish them from thousands of others ; he will 
 track the hare over the ground for miles, guided only by the 
 odor that it leaves in its flight. 
 
 427. Acuteness of smell requires that the brain and nerve 
 of smell be healthy, and that the membrane that lines the nose 
 be thin and moist. Any influence that diminishes the sensibility 
 of the nervous filaments, thickens the membrane, or renders it 
 dry, impairs this sense. 
 
 Observation. Snvff, when introduced into the nose, not only 
 diminishes the sensibility of the nerve, but thickens the lining 
 membrane. This thickening of the membrane obstructs tlie 
 passage of air through the nostrils, and thus obliges " snuff- 
 takers" to open their mouths when they breathe. 
 
 424. What is the use of this sense ? 425. What is said of this sense 
 among the North American Indians ? 426. In the dog ? 427. What does 
 acuteness of smell require ? What will irapaj: this sense ? What efiect 
 nas imuff upon the nasal organ ? 
 
8ENS£ OF VI&ION. 143 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI. 
 
 SENSE OF VISION. 
 
 428. This sense contributes more to the enjoyment and hap- 
 piness of man than any of the other senses. By it, we per- 
 ceive the form, color, size, and position of objects that surround 
 us. The beautiful organ of vision, or sight, is the Eye. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE ORGANS OF VISION. 
 
 429. The eye is shaped like a globe, and is placed in a 
 cavity in front of the skull. The sides of the globes are com- 
 posed of three coats^ or membranes. The interior of the globe 
 is filled with certain substances called Hu'mors. 
 
 430. The coats are three in number : Ist. ^/The ScU-roi'ic 
 and Corn'e-a. 2d. The Cho'roid, Tris, and Cil'ia-ry processes, 
 3d. The Ret'i-na. 
 
 431. The HUMORS are also three in number: 1st. The 
 A*qvI-^\iSy or watery. 2d. The Crys'tal-line. 3d. The 
 Vit're-ous^ or glassy. 
 
 432. The sclerotic coat is firm, and its color white ; hence, 
 It is frequently called the " white of the eye." From its tough- 
 ness, it forms the principal support to this organ. This mem- 
 brane, with the cornea in front, encloses the eye. 
 
 433. The cornea is the transparent part of the eye in front, 
 which projects -nore than the rest of the globe. It is shaped 
 like the crystal of a watch, and, in health, gives the eye its 
 sparkling brilliancy. 
 
 428 — 449. Crive the structure of the different parts of the eye. 429. De- 
 joribe the eye. 430. Name the coats of the eye. 431. Name the humors 
 of the eye. 432. Describe the sclerutic coat. 433. Where is the cornea 
 situated ? 
 
144 ANATOy.Y, PI1Y3I0L0GY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 434. The CHOROID coat is of a dark color upon its inner 
 surface. It contains a great number of blood-vessels, which 
 give nourishment to diiFerent parts of the eye. 
 
 435. The iris is situated a short distance behind the cornea. 
 It is the most delicate of all the muscles of the body. This 
 pait gives the blue, gray, or black color to the eye. 
 
 436. In the centre of the iris is ar. opening called the jni'fi'd* 
 which enlarges or contracts, according to the quantity of liglit 
 that falls upon the eye. 
 
 Fig. 76. 
 
 Fig. 75. A section of the eye, Been il^om witliin 1, The divided edge of the thre« 
 conifl. 2, Tlie pupil. 3, The iria. 4, The ciliary procedses. 5, The acollopedl u>rdei 
 of the retina. 
 
 437. On viewing the part of the eye near the pupil, small 
 Hnes, of a lighter color, will be seen passing to the outer part of 
 the iris ; these are called ciliary processes. They are about 
 sixty in number. 
 
 438. The retina is the innermost coat of the eye. It is 
 
 * From pu pa, Latin, a babe ; because it reflccta the diminisliecl 
 image of the person who looks \ipon it. 
 
 434. Describe the choroid coat. 43<'5. Where is the iris situated? What 
 ia said of this coat ? 436. Wliere is the pupil of the eye ? Explain fig. 
 76. 437- Describe the ciliary processes. 43S. Give the structure of the in* 
 nermost coat of the eye. 
 
SENSE OF VISION. 
 
 i4ft 
 
 formed, in part, by an expansion of the optic nerve over the 
 botton' of the eye, where ihe sense of vision is first received 
 
 439. The aqueous humor occupies the space between tho 
 coinea and crystalline humor, both before and behind the iria. 
 
 440. The crystalline humor (lens) lies behind tho aque- 
 ous humor and pupil. Its form is different on the two sides. 
 When boiled, it may be separated into layers like those of aii 
 onion 
 
 Observations. 1st. The lens in tho eye of a fish is ro'ind 
 like a gl<>be, and when boiled, it may be separated into layers, 
 resembUnjjf those of the liuman eye. 
 
 Fig. 76. 
 
 Pig. 7C. A section of the (jlobe of the eye. 1, The sclerotic cont. 2, The cornoa. 
 A liU coiiiiL-cis with the sclerotic co.-it by a bevelled edge. 3, Tlie choroid coat, d, 0, The 
 .ris. 7, The pupil. 8, Tlie retina. 10, 11, II, Chambers, or c.ivities of the eye thiit 
 contain the aqueous humor. 13, The crystalline lens. 13, The vitreous buniur. 
 25, The optic nerve. 14, 16, One of the arteries of the eye. 
 
 2d. When the crystalline lens, or the membrane which sur- 
 rounds it, is changed in structure, so as to prevent the rays of 
 light passing to the retina, the afToction is called a cataract. 
 
 441. The VITREOUS humor is situated in tlie back part of 
 
 439. Whei) is the aqueous humor found? 440. The crystalline humor ? 
 How can the structure of this lens be seen ? Explain fig. 76 441. Wliere 
 \m the vitreous humor situated ? 
 
 13 
 
146 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGlENB. 
 
 the eye. It occupies more llian two thirds of the whole iuto. 
 rior of the globe of the eye. 
 
 Observation. The structure of this organ can be seen, by 
 first freezing the eye of a sheep, or un ox ; it then can be cut 
 in various directions, and each part separately examined. 
 
 442. The optic nekve, or nerve of vision, extends from 
 tl'.o brain to the back part of the eye, wliere it expands on a 
 portion of the cliuroid coat. On this expansion the iinige of 
 objects arc first formed. 
 
 Fig. 77. 
 
 Fig. 77. The second pair of nerves. 1, 1, The gh)l)e of the eye. The one on Um 
 loft is perfect, but the sclerotic coat has been removed from tiio one on the k'ght, to 
 •liow the retina. 3, The croHsing of the optic nerve. 3, 4, The brain. 5, 6, The 
 C4tininenceinent of the spinal cord. 7,8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, The cranial nerves. 
 
 4 '.3. The EYEBROWS and eyelids protect the eye from too 
 strong impressions of light, and also prevent particles of dust 
 and perspiration from falling into it. 
 
 How can the structure of the eye be seen ? 442. What is said of the 
 optic nerve ? AVhat is represented by tig. 77 ? 443. What is the use ot tha 
 vyebrows and eyelids ? 
 
 _,:;.■. -.-^KJi-'tr^^ 
 
SENSE OF VISION. 
 
 147 
 
 44-1. The EYELASHES are attached to the eyelids • and wlmn 
 iho eye is closed, they interlace, and thus prevent particles of 
 matter from injuring this delicate organ. They add very 
 greatlv to the expression of the eye. 
 
 445. The eyelids not only protect the eye, by closing it in 
 front, from too brilliant rays of light and from dust, but dis- 
 tribute eqtiiUy over the globe of the eye a watery fluid secreted 
 by glands, with which they are provided. 
 
 4-46. Beside this, there is another fluid, (tears,) secreted by 
 the lacli'ry-rnal, or tear-gland, above the eye. The tears flow to 
 the eye by several minute ducts. As this fluid passes over the 
 eye, the small atoms of dust are swept away, by the process 
 of "winking," and with the tears pass into two ducts at the 
 inner corner of both eyelids. 
 
 Fig. 78. 
 
 Fig. 78. 1, The tear-gland. 9, The ducts tliat pass from this glard to the eys 
 3, 3, DucU at the inner corner of the eyelids. 4, The duct tliat opens into the nose. 
 
 447. These small ducts usjally convey the tears away as quick- 
 .y as they are formed ; but when the eye is irritated, or the mind 
 
 444. "What is the use of the eyelashes ? 445. Give another use of these 
 protecting parts of the eye. 416 Where are tears formeJ ? Wliat is the 
 tne of tears? What does fig. 78 represent ? 447. What is the effect when 
 the eye is irritated ? 
 
148 
 
 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENA 
 
 affected bj- various emotions, they flow to the eye too iipidlj to 
 oe conveyed to the nose, and they then course down the cheek. 
 
 448. The ORBIT, or bony cavity, m which the globe of the 
 eye is placed, is hned with a thick cushion of fat, in order that 
 the eye may move in all directions, with perfect freedom ana 
 without friction. • 
 
 449. The eye is moved by six muscles, one extremity of 
 which is attached to the bones of the orbit ; the other extrem- 
 ity to the globe of the eye. 
 
 Fig. 79. 
 
 Pig 79. A view of the eye and Its muscles, a, b, e, d, e, Five of these muscles. 
 /, The optic nerve. The bono is seen above and below the eye. 
 
 Observation. If the external muscle is too short, the eye is 
 turned out, producing the "wall eye." If the internal muscle 
 is contracted, the eye is turned inward toward the nose. It \a 
 then called a " cross eye." 
 
 448. How lire the raoverncnts of the eye facilitated ? 449. How many 
 muscles move the <^ye ? Wluit is the effect if the external muscle is con* 
 Iracted ? The iiiteruul muscle ? 
 
"^ 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE ORGANS OF VISION. 
 
 149 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE ORGANS OF VISION. 
 
 450. As the eye is strictly an optical instniment, it is neces- 
 sary to know the laws that regulate the transmission of light, 
 before the use of the different parts of this organ can bo 
 understood. 
 
 451. It is a law of optics, that the rays of light, while passing 
 through the same medium, proceed in straight lines ; but that 
 they are turned out of their course when they pass from one 
 medium to another of different density. They are then said to 
 be refracted. 
 
 Kg. 80. 
 
 Fig 90. The course of the ray« of light coming fVom an object and passing through 
 the eye. A, A pen, an inverted image of which is painted on the retina of the eye, 
 at B. 
 
 452. Another law is, that the rays of light, as they become 
 more distant from the luminous body, diverge, or extend farther 
 from each other. We would also add, that the rays of light 
 f-om an object, in passing through the eye, cross each other. 
 Hence, the image of the object is inverted on the retina. 
 
 450 — 454. G-ive the ph/swIo<jy of the organs of vision. 450. What is 
 necessary before the use of the different parts of the eye can be understood ? 
 
 451. Give the first law in reference to light. What is represented by fig. 80 ? 
 
 452. The secord law. Why is the image of objects inverted on the retina? 
 
 13 • 
 
150 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 453. \\ e will now pass to the use of the diflcrent parts of 
 the eye. The eyebrows, eyelids, and eyelashes, are pro* 
 tooting organs to tnis delicate instrument ; while the coats give 
 form and protection to the more delicate parts within. 
 
 4M. The transparent cornea and humors are mediums of 
 diflerent density ; so that the direction of the rays of light that 
 leave the object at which we look, are refracted and form upon 
 the retina a small, but clear image of that object. The im- 
 pression of the image upon the retina, is then carried to the 
 brain by the optic nerve. 
 
 Observations. 1st. When the cornea and crystalline lens 
 become flattened, as in old age, the image is loimed beyond 
 the retina. This defect is remedied by wearing convex glasses. 
 
 2d. When the cornea and crystalline lens are too convex, 
 hn image of the object will be formed before the retina. This 
 defect of the eye is called near-sightedness. To give such 
 persons longer vision, it is necessary to wear concave glasses. 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE ORGANS OF VISION. 
 
 455. The eye, like other organs of the hody, should be used^ 
 and then rested. If we look intently at an object for a long 
 time, the eye becomes wearied, and the power of vision dimin- 
 i.«hed. On the contrary, if the eye is not called into action, its 
 functions are enfeebled. 
 
 4.56. Sudden transitions of light should be avoided. The 
 irii enlarges or contracts, as the light that falls upon the eye is 
 faint or strong; but the change is not instantaneous. Hence the 
 
 453. ^Vhat parts of the eye are used to protect this aelicate organ ? 
 To give it form ? 454. What is said of the use of the cornea and humors ? 
 Whntt do persons need convex glasses ? When concave ? 455 — 461. Give 
 the h"jiene of the organs of vision. 455. How should the eye be used ? 
 What '8 the eflect of using the eye too long ? Of not calling it into action ? 
 456. What should be avoided in using the eye ? 
 
 JVr>'«i. Review the anatomy and physiology of the eye from €g. 76, 
 or fio->u anatomical outline plate 10. 
 
/ 
 
 /■/ 
 
 : r 
 
 1 
 
 f 
 
 <■ 
 
 > 
 
 
 ,' 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE ORGANS OF VISION. 151 
 
 imperfect vision in passing from a strong to a dim light, and the 
 overwhelming sensation experienced on goiig from a dimly 
 lighted room to one brilliantly lighted. 
 
 457. As far as possible^ avoid all oblique positions of the 
 eye, when viewing objects. If the eye is turned obliquely in 
 viewing objects, it may produce an unnatural contraction of the 
 muscle called into action. This contraction of the muscle is 
 called strabismus; or cross-eye. 
 
 458. Children should be trained to use the eye upon objects 
 at dijerent distances. This is necessary, in order that the 
 vision may be correct when objects at various distances are 
 viewed, as the eye accommodates itself to receive impressions 
 from objects remote as well as near. 
 
 459. When particles of dust get upon the eye, the individual 
 should be placed before a strong light, the lids held open, and 
 the particles removed with the corner of a fine linen or silk 
 handkerchief. Sometimes the substance is concealed under 
 the upper eyelid, and it may be then exposed by turning back 
 the lid in the following manner. 
 
 460. Take a knitting-needle, or small, slender piece of stick, 
 which is perfectly smooth, and place it over the upper lid, in 
 contact with and just under the edge of the orbit ; then, holding 
 it firmly, seize the lashes with the fingers of the disengaged 
 hand, and gently turn the lid back over the stick. 
 
 461. Too many trials ought not to be made, if unsucoesstUi, 
 as much inflammation may be induced ; but a surgeon ought 
 to be consulted as soon as possible. Eye-stones ought never 
 to be placed in the eye, as they often cause more irritation 
 than the evil which they are intended to remedy. 
 
 457. Wliat should be avoided in viewing objects ? 458. Why should we 
 ▼lew objects at different distances ? 4"59. What should be done whfa 
 particles of dust get npon the eye ? 460. How can particles of dust b» 
 removed from the upper eyelid ? 461. What should be avoided ? 
 
152 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENB. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII. 
 
 SENSE OF HEARING. 
 
 462. The sense of hearing is next in importance to that of 
 vision. Through this sense we are enabled to perceive sounds, 
 that not only subserve to our connfort and pleasure, but are 
 instrumental to our intellectual enjoyments. The organ of 
 hearing, or the Ear^ is one of the most complicated in the 
 human body. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE ORGANS OF HEARING. 
 
 463. The ear is composed of three parts: 1st. The Ex- 
 ter'nal ear. 2d. The Tym'pan-um^ or middle ear. 3d. The 
 Lah'y-rinth^ or internal ear. 
 
 464. The external ear presents many ridges and furrows, 
 arising from the folds of the cartilage that form it. A ftT.nel- 
 shaped tube extends from the external to the middle ear. 
 
 Observation. Many animals have small muscles that move 
 the external ear, in order to catch sounds from every direction. 
 The hare, rabbit, and horse, afford good examples. 
 
 465. At the internal extremity of the tube, is a thin, semi- 
 transparent membrane, that separates the external from the 
 middle ear. It is called mem'hra-na tym'pan-i^ or drum of 
 tlie ear. This and the bitter wax found around the hairs in the 
 tube, prevent insects from entering the head. 
 
 466. The middle ear is connected with the internal and 
 
 ■ ' ^ ' ■ ■ ■ '~ III — I — —I I . I M 
 
 462. What is said of the sense of hearing ? 463 — 478. Give the anatomy 
 of the cn-gans of hearing . 463. Name the parts of the ear. 464. Describe th« 
 external ear. What is said of the ears of horses, rabbits, &c. ? 465, De- 
 scribe the drum of the ear. 4o6. How is the m.ddle ear connected TritA 
 .He internal cavity ? 
 

 ANATOMY OF THE ORGANS OF HEARING. 
 
 153 
 
 most important cavity, by four small bones, which are the most 
 delicate and beautifully shaped bones in the body. These are 
 so arranged, as to form a chain from the drum of the ear to 
 the labyrinth. 
 
 467. From the middle ear, a tube opens Into the back part 
 of the throat, called Eu-sta'chi-an^ which admits air into this 
 part of the ear. If this tube is closed by disease of the throat, 
 hearing is impaired. 
 
 Fig. 81. 
 
 Fig. 81. a, The external ear. e, The tube that leads to the middle ear g, The 
 drum of the ear. «, K, The middle ear. ft, /, A, The internal ear. i, The tube tha« 
 leads U' the throat d, The auditory nerve. 
 
 468. The internal ear is very intricate, and the uses of 
 Its various parts are not well known. It is called the labyrinth^ 
 from its many windings. This part of the ear is composed of 
 a three-cornered cavity, called the ves'ti-bule., the coch'le-a^ 
 (fPDin its resembling a snail shell,) and the sew- i-ct>'cM-/ar canals. 
 
 467. What tube opens into the middle ear ? What is its use ? Explaii 
 fig. 81. 468 Describe the internal ear. 
 
\b4 
 
 ANATOIttY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE 
 
 4'/<9. The internal ear is the only part that is absolutely 
 essential in hearing. Other parts, already described, may be 
 removed, and yet the person may hear. 
 
 Fig. 82. 
 
 Fig. fi?. A view of the labyrinth laid open. This figure Is highly magnified 
 
 I, 1, Tlie coclilea. Q, 2,3, 3, Two channels, that wind two and a half turns around 
 B central point, (5.) 7, The central portion of the labyrinth, called the vestibule. 
 
 II, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, The semicircular canals. The cochlea and semicircular 
 canals open into the vestibule. 
 
 470. The auditory nerve, or nerve of hearing, proceeds 
 from the brain, and expands upon the membrane that lines the 
 internal ear, similar to the expansion of the optic nerve. 
 
 469. Wliat part of the ear is absolutely essential in hearing ? What does 
 fig. 82 represent ? 470. Describe the auditory nerre. 
 
. ^ 
 
 PHT3T01.OOY OF THE ORGANS OP HEARING 155 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE ORGANS OF HEARING 
 
 471. Hearing is that function by which we ootain a knowl- 
 edge of the vibratory motions of bodies, which constitute 
 sounds. The precise function of all the different parts of the 
 ear are not known. 
 
 472. The function of the external ear, is to collect sounds 
 and reflect them into the tube that connects the external with 
 the middle ear. The " membrana tympani " receives all the 
 impressions of the air which enter the tube, and conveys them 
 to the bones of the ear. It also serves to moderate the in- 
 iensity of sound. 
 
 473. The supposed office of the middle ear, is to carry the 
 vibrations made on the membrana tympani to the internal ear. 
 This is effected by the air which it contains, and by the chain 
 of small bones that are enclosed in this cavity. 
 
 474. But little is known of the functions of the internal ear ; 
 its parts are filled with a watery f\uid in which the filaments of 
 the auditory nerve terminate. 
 
 475. The auditory nerve, like the optic, has but one function, 
 that of special sensibility, or transmitting sound to the brain. 
 The nerves which furnish the ear with ordinary sensibility, 
 proceed from the fifth pair. 
 
 476. The transmission of sound through the different parts 
 
 471 — 476. Give the use of the organs of hearing. 471. "Wliat is hearing ? 
 
 472. What is the function of the external car ? Of the drum of the ear \ 
 
 473. "What is the use of the middle ear ? 474. What is said of the func- 
 ^ons of tne intoical ear ^ 475. Of the auditory nerve ? 
 
 jrjii 
 
156 
 
 4NA70M5r, PHYSIOLOGY, AND n\GlEU£. 
 
 of the eai, will now be explained by the aid of fig. 83. The 
 vibrations of tlie air are collected by the external ear, and 
 conducted through the tube (1) to the membrana tympani, (2.) 
 
 Fig. 83. 
 
 Pig. 83. A view of all the parta of the ear. 1, The tube that leads to th» in! tea] 
 ear. 2, Tlie ineinbraua tympani. 3, 4, 5, The bones of the ear. 7, The centra' part 
 of the labyrinth named the vestilmie. 8,9,10, The semicircular canals. 11,18 Th<» 
 channels of the cochlea. 13, The auditory norve. 14, The channel from the mid- 
 dle ear to the throat, (eusjtachian tube.) 15, The chorda tyin-fUtui nerve. 16. The 
 Btyloid process. 17, The seventh pair of nerves, (facial.) 16, The mastoid pkocoas 
 of the temporal bone. 
 
 From the membrana tympani the vibrations pass along the 
 chain of bones, (3, 4, 5.) The bone (5) communicates with 
 the internal ear, (7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 11, 11, 12, 12, 12.) From 
 the internal ear the impression is carried to the brain by the 
 auditory nerve, (13.) 
 
 Nnte. Let the pupil review the anatomy abd physiology of the ear &oi» 
 fig. 83, or from anatomical outline plate 10. 
 
HTQIENK OF THE ORGANS OF HEAHINO. 157 
 
 HYGIENE OF THE ORGANS OF HEARING 
 
 477. Hearing, like the other senses, is capable of very ^/eai 
 improvement. By cultivation, the blind are enabled to judge 
 with great accuracy the distance of bodies in motion. It is also 
 capable of 'mprovement when all the other senses are perfect. 
 Thus the Indian will distinguish sounds that cannot be heard 
 jy the white man. 
 
 478. If this sense is destroyed in early Ufe, the person 
 also loses the power of articulating words. Hence a man 
 born deaf is always dumb. 
 
 479. Acute hearing requires perfection in the structure and 
 functions of the different parts of the ear, and that portion of 
 the briin from which the auditory nerve proceeds. 
 
 480. The common causes of impaired hearing, are a thick- 
 ening of the membrana tympani of the ear, an accumulation 
 of wax upon its exterior surface, a closure of the eustachian 
 tube, disease of the brain, palsy of the auditory nerve, and 
 destruction of the middle and internal ear. 
 
 481. It is injurious to put the heads of pins into the ear, as 
 they frequently cause inflammation. The wax can be softened 
 by dropping into the tube some oil, and in a few hours remove 
 it, by ejecting warm soap-suds into the ear. 
 
 Observation. When worms and insects find their way into 
 the tube of the external ear, they can usually be driven out, by 
 dropping in warm olive-oil. 
 
 477 — 481. Give the hygiene of the organs of hearing. 477. Show how the 
 faculty of hearing is capable of improvement. 478. "What follows the los* 
 of hearing in early life ? 479. On what does acute hearing depend } 
 480. State some of the causes of impaired hearing. 481, What caution ia 
 given respecting the use of pins in the ear ? How can insects be removed 
 ("om the ear ? 
 
 14 
 
1 58 ANATOMY, rnVSlOLOGY, AND nVGIENB 
 
 CHAPTER XXXy. 
 
 MEANS or rRESEllViNO THE HEALTH. 
 
 482. Our bodies are constituted according to certain laws, 
 and every person should learn these, in order to regulate hia 
 actions and duties, so that the health may he unimpaired, and 
 the power of enjoyment, activity, and usefulness continue while 
 life lasts. 
 
 483. It is a law of the muscles, that they should either be 
 used in some occupation, or called into action by some social 
 j)lay and active sport. (See Chap. VIII.) 
 
 484. All admit that food is necessary to sustain life; and 
 unless it be of a proper quality, taken in proper quantities, and 
 at proper times, the functions of the digestive organs will bo 
 deranged, and disease produced. (See Chap. XII.) 
 
 485. Pure air is essential to the full enjoyment of health. 
 The close, impure air of heated rooms and crowded assemblies 
 may be breathed, and the effect be so gradual as not to arrest 
 attention ; yet it is a violation of the physical laws. (See 
 Chap. XXI.) 
 
 486. The body also requires sleep ; and if it is not taken at 
 the right time, or with regularity, we do not feel a full reiVesh- 
 ment from " tired nature's sweet restorer." Let youth be taught 
 that " early to bed and early to rise " gives him health and its 
 attendant blessings. The brain, like other organs of the body, 
 should be called into action at proper times. (See Chap. XXIX, ) 
 
 482. Why is it incumbent on every person to learn the laws of health ? 
 483. Give a law of the muscles. 484. In preserviLg the health, why is it 
 necessary to give attention to the food which is eaten ? 48^. What beside 
 food is essential to the full enjoyment of health ? What is said of the im- 
 Dure air of heated rooms and crowded assemblies ? 48G. What shi^uld \)« 
 3l>served 'n regard to sleep ? 
 
REMOVAL OF DJ EASE. 159 
 
 487. From the extent of the surface of the skin, and th«» 
 close sympathy that exists between it and those organs whose 
 ofTice IS to remove the waste particles of matter from the body, 
 it is, therefore, very important in the preservation of the health, 
 that tlie functions of this membrane be properly maintained. 
 (See Chap. XXVI.) 
 
 REMOVAL OF DISEASE. 
 
 4S8. It is seldom that a physician is called in the first sta{.^e8 
 of disease. At this period, the treatment adopted should bo 
 proper and judicious, or the suflbrings of the patient are in- 
 creased, and life, to a greater or less degree, is jeopardized. 
 Hence the utility of knowing what should be done^ and what 
 should not be done, in order that the health may be rapidly 
 regained. 
 
 489. In all instances of acute disease, it is proper to rest, 
 not only the body, but the mind. To efTcct this, the patient 
 should cease from physical exertion, and also withdraw his 
 thoughts from study and business operations. This should be 
 done, even if the person is but slightly indisposed. 
 
 490. Select a room for a sick person that is exposed to as 
 little external noise as possible, as impressions made on the 
 ear greatly influence the nervous system. Likewise select a 
 spacious, well-ventilated apartmeni, that has no superfluous 
 furniture. The practice of placing a sick person in a small, 
 ill-arranged sleeping-room, when a more spacious room can be 
 used, is poor economy, not to aay unkind. 
 
 491. Care is necessary in regulating the light of a sick-room. 
 While a strong light would produce on increased action of the 
 vessels of the brain, on the contrary, a moderate light would be 
 
 487. Why should the functions of the skin be properly maintained ? 
 488. "What is important in the first stages of disease ? 489. What is proper 
 in all instances of acute disease ? How can it be efr'^*,ed ? 490. What 
 rooms should be selected for the sick ? Why ? 491. "What is said in refer- 
 ence to the quantity jf lij;ht admitted into a sick-room ? 
 
160 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 an appropriate stimulus to this organ. It is seldom necessary 
 to exclude all light from the sick chamber. 
 
 492 A sick person, whether a child or an adult, should not 
 be disturbed by visitors, even if their calls are short. The ex- 
 citement of meeting them is followed by a depression of the 
 nervous system. The more dangerous and apparently nearer 
 death the sick person is, the more r'gorous should be the obser- 
 vance of this suggestion. 
 
 493. Nor should ilio sick-roon be opened to privileged 
 classes ; for the excitement caused by a visit from relations 
 and the virtuous, will do as much injury to the aick, as that 
 produced by strangers and the vicious. The custom of visiting 
 and conversing with sick friends during the intervals of daily 
 labor, and particularly on Sunday, is a great evil. No person 
 will thus intrude herself in the sick chamber, who cares more 
 for the welfare of the suffering friend than the gratification of 
 a sympathetic curiosity. Inquiries can be made of the family 
 respecting the sick, and complimentary or necessary messages 
 can be communicated through the nurse. 
 
 Hhistration. While attending a Miss B., of N. H., sick of 
 fever, I pronounced her better, withdrew medicine, directed 
 a simple, low diet, and the exclusion of all visitors. In the 
 evening, I was sent for, to attend her. There was a violent 
 relapse into the disease, which continued to increase in severity 
 until the fourth day, when death terminated her suffering? I 
 learned that, soon after I gave directions that no visitors be ad 
 mitted into her room, several particular friends were permitted 
 to enter the chamber and talk with the sick girl. Their conver- 
 sation produced a severe headache ; and, to use the language 
 of the patient, " it seemed as if their talk would kill me ; " and 
 it did kill Iter. 
 
 494. No solid food should be taken in the first stages of dis- 
 
 492. What effect have calls on the sick ? 493. What is said of the cus- 
 tom of calling and conversing with the sick during the intervals of daily 
 labor ? Give an illustration. 494, What suggestions relative to food, is 
 the first stages of disease i 
 
L 
 
 REMOVAL OF DISEASE. 161 
 
 easj, even if the nfTcction is slirrht. Tlio thirst can be nllayed 
 by drinking cold water, barlcy-wutcr, and other pieparations of 
 an unstimulating character. It is wrong to terrif t the appetite 
 of a person who is indisposed. The cessation of u desire for 
 food, is the warning of Nature, that the system is in such a state 
 that it cannot be digested. 
 
 495. When a patient is recovering from illness, the food 
 should be simple, and in quantities not so great as to oppress 
 the stomach. It should" xlso be given with regularity. " Eut 
 little and often," with no regard to regularity, is a bad practice. 
 
 496. When a physician attends a sick person, he should 
 have the special management of the food, particularly after the 
 medicine has been withdrawn and the patient is convalescent. 
 The prevailing idea that every person may safeiy advise rel:*- 
 tive to food, or that the appetite of the convalescing person 
 will guide correctly, is dangerous, and cannot be too much 
 censured. 
 
 Ulustration. In 1832, I attended a Miss M., sick of fever. 
 After an illness of a few days, the fever abated, and I directed 
 a simple, unstimulating diet. Business called me from the town 
 two days. During my absence, an officious matron called ; 
 found her weak, but improving ; and told her she needed food 
 to strengthen her ; and " it would now do her good." Aixord- 
 ingly, a piece of beefsteak was prepared, and given to the con- 
 valescent girl. She ate heartily, and the result was, a relapse 
 into a fever more violent than the first attack. 
 
 497. It is very important in disease that the skin be /cfj)t 
 
 clean. A free action of the vessels of this part of the body 
 
 exerUs a ';reat influence in removing disease from the internal 
 
 ci'-gans, as well as keeping them m health, If the thirty ounces 
 
 f — — — 
 
 4P5. When the patient is convalescent, how should the food be given ? 
 What is said of the practice of eating " little and often " ? 496. Who 
 should have the special management of food when medicine is withdrawn t 
 What idea prevails in the community ? Give an illustration of the evil 
 effects attending such an idea. 497. Does the skin exert a great influenctj 
 in removing disease from the internal organs, as well as in keeping them 
 'p health i 
 
 14* 
 
1G2 ANATOMV, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 of waste, liurtful matter, that passes through the " pores" of the 
 skin in twenty-fuur hours, is not removed by frequent bathing 
 and dry rubbing, the action of these vossels is deranged, which 
 m^ reases the disease of the internal organs. 
 
 Illustration Mrs. M. R., of N., Mass., was aflFlicted with 
 disease of the ungs and cough. This was accompanied with a 
 dr}', inactive condition of the skin. As medicine had no salu- 
 tary effect in relieving her cough, she was induced by the 
 advice of the clergyman of the parish to enter upon a system- 
 atic course of bathing twice every day. Soon the skin became 
 soft, its proper functions were restored, the disease of the lungs 
 yielded, and the cough disappeared. 
 
 498. The sick-room should be kept very clean, and in per- 
 fect order. When a sick person sees ever/ thing neat and in 
 its proper place, a feeling of comfort is induced, which aids in 
 the recovery of the health ; while filth and disorder are objects 
 of annoyance, and tend to depress the nervous system. 
 
 499. Every sick person should breathe /iMre air. The purer 
 ,he blood that courses through the body, the greater the energy 
 of the system to remove disease. The confined, vitiated air of 
 the sick -chamber not unfrequently prolongs disease ; and in 
 many instances, the affection is not only aggravated, but even 
 rendered fatal, by its injurious influences. 
 
 Illustrations. 1st. In 1833, I was called, in consultation 
 with another physician, to Mr. H., who was much debilitated 
 and delirious. I-'or several successive days he had not slept. 
 His room was kept very warm and close, for fear he would 
 " take cold." The only change that I made in the treatment, 
 was to open the door and window, at a distance from the bed. In 
 a short time, the delirium ceased, and he fell into a quiet slum- 
 ber. From this time he rapidly recovered, and I have no doubt 
 that the delirium was the result of breathing impure air. 
 
 498. How should the sick-room be kept r 499. "Why should every sick 
 person, partic ilarly, breatlie pure air ? Are not diseases prolonged, and 
 even rendered fatal, from breathing the impure, vitiated air of the sick 
 ehamber ? Give illustration 1st. 
 
REMOVAL OF DISEASE. 163 
 
 t 
 
 2d. Formerly, every precaution was used to prevent persons 
 sick of the small-pox from breathing fresh air. When Mrs. 
 Ramsay had tiiis disease in Charleston, S. C„, her friends, sup- 
 posing that life was extinct, caused her body to l»e removed 
 from the house to an open shed. The pure air revived the vital 
 Bpark, and she lived to be an ornament to her sex. 
 
 500. Medicine is sometimes necessary to assist the natural 
 powers of the system to remove disease ; but it Is only an assis- 
 tant. While emetics are occasionally useful in removing food 
 and other articles from the stomach, that would cause disease 
 if yulTered to remain, and cathartics are valuable, in some in- 
 stances, to rf;lieve the alimentary canal of irritating residuum, 
 yet the irequent administration of either will cause serious dis 
 ease. 
 
 501. Although medicine is useful in isome instances, yet, in 
 a great proportion of the cases of disease, including fevers and 
 inflammations of all kinds, attention to the laws of health will 
 tend to relieve the system from disease, more certainly and 
 speedily, and with less danger, than wi.en medicines are 
 administered. 
 
 502. Thomas Jeflerson, in writing to Dr. Wistar, of Phila- 
 delphia, said, " I woula have the physician learn the limit of his 
 art." I would say, Have those who are continually advismg 
 " herb teas, pills, bitters," and other " cure-alls," for any com- 
 plaint, labelled with some popular name, learn the limits of 
 their duty, namely, attention to the laws of health. The '"■'i 
 of every family, and each individual, should be, to touch not, 
 tasio not, of medicine of any kind, except when directed by 
 a well-educated and honest physician, (sudden disease fi^oni 
 accidents excepted.) 
 
 Give illustration 2d. 600. What is said of the use of medicine ? 
 
 601. ^^1lat is said of its use in fevers and many other cases of disease ? 
 
 602. What remark by Thomas Jefferson to Dr. Wistar? What should be 
 the rule of every person in regard to taking medicine ? Wliat exception ? 
 
164 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENK. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI. 
 
 DIRECTIONS lOR NURSES. 
 
 503. The nurse requires knowledge and practice to enable 
 her to discharge aright her duty to the patient, as much as 
 the physician and surgeon do to perform what is incumbent 
 en them. Woman, from her constitution and habits, is the 
 natural nurse of the sick ; and, in general, no small portion 
 of her time is spent in ministering at the couch of disease and 
 suffering. 
 
 504. As the young and vigorous, as well as the aged and 
 the infirm, are liable to be laid upon the bed of sickness, by an 
 epide.ntc, or imprudent exposure, or by some accident, it is 
 therefore necessary that the girl, as well as the matron, may 
 know how she can render services in an efficient and proper 
 manner. No girl should consider her education complete who 
 is not acquainted with the principles of the duties of a general 
 nurse and a temporary watcher. 
 
 505. It is to be regretted, that, while we have medical 
 schools and colleges to educate physicians, there is no institu- 
 tion to educate nurses in their equally responsible station. In 
 the absence of such institutions, the defect can be remedied, to 
 some extent, by teaching every girl hygiene or the laws of 
 health. To make such knowledge more available and com- 
 plete, attention is invited to the following suggestions relative 
 to the practical duties of a nurse. 
 
 506. Bathing. The nurse, before commencing to bathe 
 
 503. Does the nurse require knowledge and practice in her employment, 
 M well as the physician ? 504. Who is the natural nurse of the sick ? 
 What, then, is incumbent on every girl ? 505. Should there be Schools to 
 educate nurses, as well as physicians and surgeons ? 506. "What should a 
 nurse provide herself with, before bathing a patient ? 
 
DIRECTIONS FOR NURSES. 165 
 
 »he patient, sho ild provide herself with water, two towels, a 
 sponge, a piece of soft flannel, and a sheet, and also notice 
 the temperature of the room. 
 
 50*7 . When the patient is feeble, use tepid or warm water. 
 Cold water should only be used when the system has vigor 
 enough to produce reaction upon the skin. This is showi 
 b) the increased redness of the skin, and a feeling of warmth 
 and comfort. Before using the sponge to butbe, a sheet, o. 
 fold of cloth, should be spread smoothly over the bed, and un 
 der the patient, to prevent the bed-linen on which the "atient 
 lies from becoming damp or wet. 
 
 508. Apply the wet sponge to one part of the body at a 
 time ; as the arm, for ^stance. By doing so, the liability of 
 contracting chills is diminished. Take a dry, soft towel, wipe 
 the bathed part, and follow this by vigorous rubbing with a 
 crash towel, or, what is better, a mitten made of this material ; 
 then use briskly a piece of soft flannel, to remove all moisture 
 that may exist on the skin, and particularly between the fingei's 
 and the flexions of the joints. In this manner bathe the entire 
 body. 
 
 509. The sick should be thoroughly bathed, at least twice 
 in twenty-four hours. Particular attention should be given to 
 the parts between the fingers and toes, and about the johits, as 
 the accumulation of the waste matter is most i^bundant on these 
 p-'iis. In bathing, these portions of the system are very gen- 
 erally neglected. The best time for bathing, is when the 
 patient feels the most vigorous, and freest from exhaustion. 
 The practice of daubing the face and hands with a towel 
 dipped in hot rum, camphor, and vinegar, does not remove 
 the impurities, but causes the skin soon to feci dry, hard, 
 and uncomfortable. 
 
 507. "When should cold water be used ? 508. How .should the bathint; 
 then be performed, so that the patient may not contract a cold ? 509 How 
 often should a sick person be batheil ? What is said of daubing the lac* 
 and hauds merelv with a wet cloth ? 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
166 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 510. Food. It is the duty of every woman to know how to 
 make the simplest preparations adapted to a low diet, m the 
 most wholesome and the most palatable way. Water-gruel,* 
 which is the simplest of all preparations, is frequently so ill 
 made as to cause the patient to loathe it. Always prepare the 
 food for the sick in the neatest and most careful manner. 
 
 511. When the physician enjoins abstinence from food, the 
 nurse should strictly obey the injunction. She should be Jis 
 particular to know the physician's directions about diet, as in 
 knowing how and when to give the prescribed medicines, and 
 'jhcy them as implicitly. 
 
 512. When a patient is convalescing, the desire for food is 
 generally strong, and it often requires firmness and patience, 
 together with great care, on the part of the nurse, that the food 
 is prepared suitably, and given at proper times. The physician 
 should direct how frequently it should be taken. 
 
 513. Pure Air. It is the duty of the nurse to see that not 
 only the room is well ventilated in the morning, but that fresh 
 air is constantly coming in during the day. Great care must 
 be taken, however, that the patient does not feel the current. 
 
 514. Bed-linen, as well as that of the body, should be aired 
 every day, and oftener changed in sickness than in health 
 All clothing, when changed, should be well dried, and warmed 
 by a fire previous to its being put on the patient or the bed. 
 
 515. Temperature. The warmth of the chamber should 
 be carefully ""^atched by the nurse. The feelings of the patient 
 
 • Directions for making the simple preparations for the sick are 
 found in almost evtiy cook-book. 
 
 610. Should every woman know how to make the simple preparations 
 adapted to a low diet ? 511. Should the nurse strictly obey the injunctions 
 of the physician relative to food ? 512, What period of a person's illresa 
 requires the most care in regard to the food ? 513. Give another duty of 
 the nurse. 614. What directions respecting the bed-linen of the patient ? 
 What is necessary when there is a cliange of clothing ? 615. Why should 
 there be a well-adjusted thermometer in every sick-chamber ? 
 
REMOVAL OP DISEASE. 16? 
 
 OT nurse are not to be relied on, as an index of the ternpeiature 
 of the room. There should be a well-adjusted thermometer m 
 every sick-room. This should be frequently consulted by the 
 nurse. 
 
 516. The temperature of the sick-chamber should be mod- 
 erate. If it is so cold as to cause a chill, the disease will be 
 aggravated. If, on the other hand, it is too warm, the patient 
 is enfeebled and rendered more SKsceptible to cold on leaving 
 the sick-chamber. The Latin maxim, "/« medio tutissimus 
 iJis," (in medium there is most safety,) should be regarded in 
 the rooms of the sick. 
 
 517. Quiet. The room of the patient should be kept free 
 of noise. The community should be guided by this rule, that 
 no more persons remain in the room of the sick, than the wel- 
 fare of the patient demands. It is the duty of the physician to 
 direct when visitors can be admitted or excluded from the 
 sick-room, and the nurse should see that these directions are 
 enforced. 
 
 518. The movements of the attendants should be gentle and 
 noiseless. Shutting doors violently, creaking hinges or shoes, 
 and all unnecessary noise, should be avoideil. Most persons 
 refrain from loud talking in the sick-chamber, but are not 
 equally careful to abstain from whisperings which is often 
 more trying than a common tone. 
 
 519. The deportment and remarks of the nurse to the patient 
 sliould bv cilm and encouraging. The illness of a friend, or 
 persons who ha" recently died, should not be alluded to in the 
 sick-room. Nc doubts or fears of the patient's recovery, either 
 by a look or by a word, should be communicated by the nurse, 
 in the chamber of the sick. 
 
 516. What is said of the temperature of the sick-chamber? 517. Should 
 the sick-room be kept quiet ? 518. What is said of noise in the sick- 
 charaber ? Of whispering ? 519. What should be the deportment of thfl 
 nurse toward the patient ? Should doubts and fears of the patienf'4 
 recovrery be communicated in the sick-room ? 
 
 1 
 
168 ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY, AND HYGIENE. 
 
 520. When such information is necessary to be communi- 
 Cttted, it is the duty of the physician to impart it to the sick 
 person. 
 
 521. The nurse should not confine herself to the sick-room 
 more than six hours at a time. She should eat her food regu- 
 larly, sleep at regular periods, and take exercise daily in the 
 open air. To do this, let her quietly leave the room when the 
 patient is sleeping. A watcher, or temporary nurse, may supply 
 her place. There is but little danger of contracting disease, if 
 the nurse attends to the simple laws of health, and remains not 
 more than six hours at a time in the sick-room. 
 
 ' DIRECTIONS FCR WATCHERS. 
 
 i 
 
 522. These necessary assistants, like the nurse, should have 
 
 i knowledge and practice. They should ever be cheerful, gentle 
 
 I firm, and attentive, in the presence of the patient. 
 
 ' 523. A simple, nutritious supper should be eaten before 
 
 I entering the sick-room; and it is well, during the night, to 
 
 ; take some plain food. 
 
 524. When watching in cold weather, a person should be 
 warmly dressed, and furnished with an extra garment, as a 
 
 i cloak or shawl, because the system becomes exhausted toward 
 
 ' morning, and less heat is generated in the body. 
 
 525. Whatever may be wanted during the night, should be 
 I • brought into the sick-chamber, or the adjoining room, before 
 I the family retires for sleep, in order that the slumbers of the 
 \ patient be not disturbed by haste, or searching for needed 
 I articles. 
 
 620. When necessary to impart such intelligence, on whom docs it de- 
 pend ? 521. How long should a nurse remain in the sick-chamber at a 
 time i 522. What qualifications arc necessary in a watcher ? 523. What 
 directions in regard to the food of the watcher ? 624. AVhcn watching in 
 cold weather, what precaution is necessary ? 525. What suggestion to 
 waichera ? 
 
 i 
 
SIRBCTIONS FOR WATCHERS. 169 
 
 i26. The same general directions should be observed by 
 watchers, as are given to the nurse ; nor should the watcher 
 deem it necessary to make herself acceptable to Ihe patient by 
 agreeable conversation. 
 
 5Uf7. It can hardly be expected that the farmer, who boj 
 been laboting hard in the field, or the mechanic, who has toiled 
 during the day, is qualified to render all those little attentions 
 */hat a sick person requires. Hence, would it not be more 
 bcnevoicnt and economical to emp'oy and pay watchers, who 
 are quaafied by knowledge and trainings to perform this duty 
 in a fa.thful manner, while the kindness and sympathy of 
 friends may be practically manifested by assisting to defray 
 the expanses of these qualified and useful assistants ? 
 
 ^■^•^W^— ^ I ■ ■ MM-I ■- ■ I I !■ — — ^-^^ I ■ ■ ■ M ■ 1^ ■■■ .1 I ■ II H I BM .,,.1 m 
 
 626. WIiAt should watchers observe? 527. What is saidof employin|( 
 those persv Jis to watch who labor hard during the day ? 
 
 16 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 POISONS AND THEIR ANTIDOTES. 
 
 » 
 
 fl28 Poisoning, either from accident or design, is of such frequency ax.dl 
 dangei^that it is of the greatest importance that every person should know 
 the proper made of procedure in such cases, in order to render immediate 
 a88istan«i« when within his power. 
 
 629. loisons are divided into two classes — mineral (^ which will include 
 the acid»^ and vegetable 
 
 630. Tue first thing, usually to be done, when it is ascertained that a 
 poison hhj been swallowed, is to evacuate the stomach, unless vomit- 
 ing takes /lace spontaneously. Emetics of the sulphate of zinc, (white 
 vitriol,) ov ipecacuanha, (ipecac,) or the wine of antimony, should be 
 given. 
 
 531. Wh«n vomiting has commenced, it should be aided by large and 
 frequent draughts of the following drinks ; flaxseed tea, gum-water, slip- 
 pery-elm tea, barley-water, sugar and water, or any thing of a mucilaginous 
 or diluent character. 
 
 MINERAL POISONS. 
 
 632. Ammonia. — The water of ammonia^ if taken in an over-dose, and 
 In an undiluted state, acts as a violent corrosive poison. 
 
 633. The best and most effectual antidote is vinegar. It should be ad- 
 
 888. Is it useful to know the antidotes or remedies for poison ? 529. Into how many 
 daasea are poiscns divided ? 530. What is the first thing to be done when it is ascer- 
 tained that poison has been swallowed ? 531. What should be taken after the vomit- 
 ing has commenced i 532. What effect has an over-dose of ammonia ? 533. The 
 outtdutef 
 
APPENDIX. 171 
 
 ministered in Wftter, witAout delay. It neutriilizes the ammonia, and roa 
 ders ii inactive. Emetics should not be given. 
 
 634. Antimony. — Ine loine of antimony and tartar emetic, if taken tn 
 over-doses, cause distressing vomiting. In addition to the diluent, mu- 
 cilaginous drinks, give a tea-spoonful of the sirup of poppies, paregoric, or 
 twenty drops of laudanum, every twenty minutes, until five or six doser 
 have been take:;, or the vomiting ceases. 
 
 635. Tlie antiuotea are ntU-yalls and oak bark, which may be administered 
 in infusion, or by steeping in water. 
 
 636. Arsenic. — "WHien this has been taken, administer an emetic of 
 ipecac, speedily, in mucilaginous teas, and use the stomach-pump as soon 
 as possible. 
 
 537. The antidote is the hydrated peroxide of iron. It should be kept 
 constantly on hand at the apothecaries* shops. It may be given in any 
 quantity, without injurious results. 
 
 638. CoprER —The most common cause of poisoning from this metal, 
 is through the careless use of cooking utensils made of it, on which the 
 acetate of cojjper {\crdigTia) has been allowed to form. When this has been 
 taken, immediately induce vomiting, give mucilaginous drinks, or the 
 white of eggs, diffused in water. 
 
 539. The antidote is the carbonate of soda, which should be administered 
 without delay. 
 
 640. Lead. — The acetate (sugar) of lead is the preparation of this metal 
 which is liable to be taken accidentally, in poisonous doses. Induce imme- 
 diate vomiting, by emetics and diluent drinks. 
 
 641. The antidote is diluted sidphuric add. When this acid is not to be 
 obtained, either the sulphate of magnena, (epsom salts,) or the sulphate 
 of soda, (glauber's salts,) will answer every purpose. 
 
 642. Mercury. — The preparation of this mineral by which poisoning is 
 
 Should an emetic be given for this poison .' 534. What effect has an over-dose of 
 the wine of antimony or tartar emetic? 5.15. What is ttio antidote? 5,?6. What 
 should immediately be done when arsenic is swallowed ? 5.T7. VVIint is the anti- 
 dote' Can any quantity of this prepiiraticm of iron be given without injurious r»- 
 iiills? 5.38. What should be given when verdigris has been taken into the stomach' 
 639. What is tlie antidote? 540. What should immediately be given when sugar 
 of lead is taken ? 541. What is the antidute i 
 
172 APPENiilX. 
 
 commonly produced, is arrosive ntblim ite. The mode cf treatment ta b» 
 pursued, when this poison han been sw. ilowcd, is as ful.ows : The whitet 
 of a dozen eggs should be beaten in t\>o quarts of cold water, and a tum- 
 Dier-full given every two minutes, to induce vomiting. When the whites 
 of eggs are not to be obtained, soap and water should be mixed with 
 wucat flour, and given in copious draughts, and the stomach-pump in- 
 troduced as soou as possible. Emetics or irritating substances ought not 
 to be given. 
 
 643. NiTUB — Saltpetre. This, in over-doses, produces violent poison- 
 ous symptoms. Vomiting should be immediately induced by large doses 
 of mucilaginous, diluent drinks ; but emetics, which irritate the stomach, 
 ought not to be given. 
 
 644. ZiNO. — Poisoning is sometimes caused by the atilphate of zinc, 
 (white vitriol.) When this takes place, vomiting should be induced, 
 aTtd aided by large draughts of mucilaginous and diluent drinks. Uso 
 the stomach-pump as soon as possible. 
 
 646. The antidote is the carbonate or super-carbotuUe of soda. 
 
 646. NiTEic, (aqua fortis,) muriatic, (marine acid,) or sulphubio 
 (oil of vitriol) acids, may be taken by accident, and produce poisonous 
 effects. 
 
 647. The antidote is calcined magnesia, which should be freely admin- 
 istered, to neutralize the acid and induce vomiting. When magnesia 
 cannot be obtained, the carbonate of potash (sala^ratus) may be given. 
 Chalk, powdered and given in solution, or strong toap suds, will answer 
 a good purpose, when the other articles are not at hand. It is of very 
 great importance that something be given speedily to neutralize the acid 
 One of the substances before named should be taken freely, in diluent and 
 mucilaginous drinks; as gum-water, milk, flaxseed or slippery-elm tea 
 Emetics ought to be avoided. 
 
 648. Oxalic Acid. — This acid resembles the sulphate of magnesia, 
 (epsom salts,) which renders it liable to be taken, by mistake, in poison- 
 ous doses. Many accidents have occurred from this circumstance. 
 They can easily be distinguished by tasting a small quantity. Epsom 
 
 543. Give the treatment when corrosive sublimate has been swallowed. 543. What 
 effect has an over-dose of saltpetre ? What treatment she uld be adopted? 544. What 
 l«i the treatment and antidote fur white vitriol.'* 547. What is the antidote for aqua 
 f jrtis and oil of vitriol ? Should emetics be avoided ? 548. How caji oxalic acid ba 
 distinguished from epsom salts? 
 
xrpENDix. 173 
 
 ioUs, when app'\led to the tongue, have a very bitter taste, while oxalit 
 acid is intcnflcly sour. 
 
 649. The antidote is mn(jnesia, between which and the anid a cheraicaJ 
 action takes place, producing the oxalate of magnesia, which is inert 
 Wlicn magnesia is not at hand, chalk, lime, or carbomite of potash, 
 (salccrat s,) will answer as a substitute. 
 
 6.50. Give the antidote in some of the mucilaginous drinks boforo na.wed 
 No time ought to be lost, but the stomach-pump should be introduced ai 
 Boon as a surgeon can be obtained. 
 
 651. Ley. — The ley obtained by the leach'Tg of ashes may be taken 
 by a child accidentally. The antidote is vinegar, or oil of any kind. The 
 vinegar neutralizes the alkali by uniting with it, forming the acetate of 
 potash. The oil unites with the alkali, and forms soap, which is less 
 caustic than the ley. Give, at the same time, large draughts of muci- 
 laginous drinks, as flaxseed tea, &c. 
 
 VEGETABLE POISONS. 
 
 652. The vegetable poisons are quite as numerous, and many of them 
 equally as violent, as any in the mineral kingdom. We shall describe the 
 most common, and which, therefore, are most liable to be taken. 
 
 653. Opium. — This is the article most frequently resorted to by those 
 wishing to commit suicide, and, being used as a common medicine, is 
 easily obtained. From this cause, also, mistakes are very liable to be 
 made, and accidents result from it. Two of its preparations, Uiicdwmm 
 and paregoric, are frequently mistaken for each other ; the former being 
 given when the latter is intended. 
 
 554. Morphia, in solution, or morphine, as it is more commonly called 
 by the public, is a preparation of the drug under consideration, with 
 wUch many cases of poisoning are produced. It is the active narcotic 
 principle of the opium ; and one grain is equal to six of this drug in its 
 usual form. 
 
 655. When an over-dose of opium, or any of its preparations, has been 
 
 - — — ^ — * 
 
 549. What la the antidote for an over-»lo3e of oxalic acid .' Wlien magnesia can- 
 not be obtained, what will answer aa a substitute ? 551. What is the antidote 
 i when ley is swallowed .' 559. Are vegetable poisons aa niuneroua and as violeul 
 
 ! In their effecta aa mineral ? 55."?. What w said of opium and ita prepatations ' 
 
 J 555, 556. What tr'^atment should be adopted when a/i uver-di>3e of opium ur auy 
 
 of ita preparations s tal<en ? 
 
 15* 
 
 1 
 
174 APPENDIX. 
 
 •Whllowcd, the iitoniach should be evacuated aa Rpecdily as possible. To 
 effect this, as much tartar emetic as can bo held on a ten cent piece, or aa 
 much ipecacuanha as can bo held on a twouty-ftve cent piece, should bo 
 dissolved in a tui nbler of warm water, and one half given at once, and the 
 remainder in twenty minutes, if the first has not, in the mean time, op- 
 erated. In the interval, copious draughts of warm water, or warm sugar 
 and water, should be drank 
 
 61)6. The use of the stomach-pump, in these cases, is of the greatest 
 Importance, and should be resorted to without delay. After most of the 
 poison has been evacuated from the stomach, a strong infusion of coJfe« 
 ouglit to be given ; or some one of the vegetable acids, such as viiieyar 
 or lemon-juice, should be administered. 
 
 657. The patient should be kept in motion, and salutary efTects will 
 often be produced by dashing a bucket of cold water on the head. Artifi- 
 cial lespiration ought to be established, and kept up for some time. If 
 the extremities are cold, r pply warmth and friction to them. After the 
 poison has been evacuated from the stomach, stimulants, as warm wine 
 and water, or warm brandy and water, ought to be given, to keep up and 
 sustain vital action. 
 
 558. Stramonium — Thom-Apple. Th's is one of the most active 
 narcotic poisons, and when taken in over-doses, has, in numerous in- 
 stances, caused death. 
 
 559. Hyosciamus — Henbane. This article, which is used as a medi- 
 cine, if taken in improper doses, acts as a virulent irritating and nar- 
 cotic poison. 
 
 660. The treatment for the two above-mentioned articles is similar to 
 that of poisoning from over-doses of opium. 
 
 661. CoNiUM — Hemlock. Hemlock, improperly called, by many, cicuta 
 when taken in an over-dose, acts as a narcotic poison. It was by thia 
 narcotic that the Athenians used to destroy the lives of individuals 
 condemned to death by their laws. Socrates is said to have been put 
 to death by this poison. When swallowed in over-doses, the treatment 
 is similar to that of opium, stramonium, aui henbane, when over-doses 
 are taken. 
 
 557. Should the person be kept in motion? What is said of artiflcial resptra- 
 lion, warmth, friction, and Htimulants.' 5G0. What should be the treatment when 
 an nver-dose of stramonium or henbane is taken? 561. What name is some- 
 Umes impro|)crly given to eonium, or hemlock ? How was this narcotic poison used 
 by the Athenians ' How are the effects of an over-dose counteracted i 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 175 
 
 562. Bkliadonna — Deadly Nightshade. Camphob Aconitb — 
 klonkshocd. Wolfsbane. Bbtony — Bryonia. Digitalis — Foxglove, 
 DuLCAMABA — Bitter-stceet. 'Jamhoou. Lobelia — Ittdian Tobacco. 
 Sanouinauia — Bloodroot. On, of Savin. Spioblia — Pinkroot. 
 Btrychninb — Nux vomica. Tobacco. All of these, when taken in 
 over-doses, are poisons of greater or less activity. The treatment of 
 poisoning, by the use of any of these articles, is similar to that pursued 
 In over-doses of opium. (See Opium, page 173.) 
 
 663. In all cases of poisoning, call a physician as soon as possible. 
 / 
 
 MEANS OF DISTINQUISHINO DEATH FROM 
 
 ASPHYXIA. 
 
 664. It is no uncommon occurrence, that persons considered dead, have 
 been restored to life at the moment when a post mortem examination was 
 to have been made, or even when they were in the coffin or tomb. This 
 mistake arises from the difficulty of distinfiishing real from appatent 
 death. 
 
 665. In death, although the limbs are stiff, their position is easily 
 changed, but they remain where last placed. When a limb is stiff from 
 convulsions or asphyxia, its position is changed with difficulty, and it ira 
 mediately returns to its former state. Cessation of breathing, or the 
 *' beating " of the heart, coldness, or insensibility, are no certain indica- 
 tions of death. The sign most certain, is well-marked putrefaction ; but it 
 does not belong to the Uiiprofcssional to decide whether putrefaction has 
 commenced ; the physician alone can establish the fact. 
 
 562. What is the treiitment when an over-dose of deadly nighti^hnde, monks, 
 hood, foxglove, Ritter-sweet, gamboge, lobelia, bloodroot, tobacco, tec, is taken' 
 tea. Hhould a physician be called In all cases when poison is swalUiwed' 5G5. liuie 
 cun death be diatinguiahed fVotn aspnvxlu/ 
 
GLOSSARY. 
 
 Ab 80RP''Ti0lf. Fmm the Latin ah- 
 Moroere, to rack up. 
 
 A-CE-T>.B'u-LUM. From the Latin aee- 
 (wm, Tineigar. The cavity In the hip- 
 bone, 8o called from its resernlilance to 
 the ancient Greek vinegar vessel. 
 
 1-WATO-MY, Fr tn the Greek ana, 
 throiiph, and temxd, I cut A descrip- 
 tion of the stmctu-.o of animals. 
 
 A-ORT'a. From the Greek aortf, to keep 
 m air. The large vessel tliat carries 
 blood froHf the heart, 
 
 Ap-pa-ra'TU8. From the Latin ad, for, 
 and parut 3, iu prejKire. A colle-tion of 
 organs. 
 
 Ap-PEND'ix. From the Latin aa, to, 
 and pendere, to hang. Something 
 added. 
 
 A'QUE-ous. From the Latin aqua, water. 
 A nunior of the eye. 
 
 Ar'te-ry. Frnnti the Greek arteria, 
 formed from aUr, air, and t«rcin, to 
 keep. The ancients believed that the 
 at.eries were filled with air, like the 
 wind-pipe. 
 
 Ab-phyx'i-a. From the Greek a, priva- 
 tive, and ^huxis, pulse. Suspended 
 animation. 
 
 AT'MOS-piiERE. From the Greek afmos, 
 vajKir, and sphaira, a sphere. The air 
 which surrounds the eaith. 
 
 AuiyiT-o-BY Belonging to the sense 
 of healing. 
 
 Ac'Ri-CLE. From the Latin auric, rb 
 ear. The two cavities of the heart 
 derive the name from their resemblance 
 to ears. 
 
 Bi-CUS'PIDS. From the Latin bis, two, 
 and eumis, a point. The name of cer 
 tain teeth. 
 
 Bile. A yellow, bitijr, naaseoua fluid, 
 secreted by the liver, 
 
 Brain. The pulpy mass enclosed in 
 the cranium, or skull -t>onea. 
 
 Broncii'i-a. From tJ e Greek hrogchos, 
 the throat. The two branches of the 
 wind-pipe. 
 
 Cap'il-la-ry. From the Latin eapiUus 
 hair. The capillary vessels are the ex- 
 tremely minute terminations of the ar- 
 teries, and coh.iuencing branches of tiia 
 veins. 
 
 Car'bon. From the Latin carbo, a coal 
 An element:^ry combustib!? substance. 
 
 Car-BON'ic, Coiiiaining carbon. 
 
 Car'PUS. From the Greek karpoa, tha 
 
 wrist. There arc eight bnnes in tos 
 
 wiist. 
 Car'ti-lage. Gristle ; a part of the 
 
 animal body, soAer than bone, but 
 
 harder than ligament. 
 
 Ca'va. Latin. Hollow. Vena Cava, i]M 
 hollow, or deep-seated vein. 
 
 Cep-e-bel'lum. The lower and smal' 
 er portion of the brain. 
 
^"'l 
 
 I 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 177 
 
 Cer'k brum The npper and larger 
 portion of the brain. 
 
 Chest. The part of the body between 
 the neck and tlin belly. 
 
 Ciio'roid. From the Greek ehoriov, the 
 skin, and eidos, resemblance. A coat 
 of the eye. 
 
 CiiYLE. From the Greek ckulos, nutri- 
 tious juice. 
 
 Chyme. From the Greek chumos, a 
 grayish juice. 
 
 Cil'lA-RY. Latin. Relating to the eye- 
 lid. 
 
 Clav'i-cle. From the Latin clavu, a 
 key. The collar-bone. 
 
 Coc'cYX. Latin. The lower extremity 
 of the spinal column. 
 
 Coch'le-a. liatin. A snail-shell. A 
 name given to one of the three cavities 
 of the iu'ernal ear. 
 
 Co'LON tiieek. A portion of the large 
 intestine. 
 
 CON'CAVE. Hollow ; as the inner sur- 
 face of a spherical body. 
 
 Con'vex. liulging; as the external sur- 
 fiice of a spherical body. 
 
 Cohn'e-A. From the Latin eomu, n. 
 horn. One of the coats of the eye. 
 
 Crys'tal-line. a humor, or lena of 
 the eye. It serves to transmit and re- 
 fract the r.'iys of light. 
 
 Cus'piD. From the Latin euspis, a point. 
 The name of certain teeth. 
 
 Ci''Ti-cLE. The external layer of the 
 skin. 
 
 Cu'Tis Ve'ra. Latin. The true skin. 
 The internal layer of the skin. 
 
 Dl'A-PHRASM. From the Greek rfm- 
 phragma, a partition. The muscle that 
 sef urates the lungs and heart from the 
 stomach, liver, and intestines. 
 
 Pl-OES'TION. The process of dissolvinr; 
 food in the stomach, and preparin;; i' 
 for circulatii^n and nourishment. 
 
 Du-o-DE'Nt'id. The first of the 8n\all 
 
 Intestine, being about twelve flngen* 
 breadth. 
 En-am'el. The smooth, hard substance 
 which covers the crcwns of the teetb. 
 
 Ep-i-olot'tis. From the Greek cjji, 
 upon, aiid glottis, the glottis. A kind 
 of cartilaginous valvo at the upp(>.7 
 part of the larynx, behind the base of 
 the tongue. 
 
 Eu-sta'chi an Tube. So called from 
 its discoverer, Euft/uhiu-i. A tube that 
 connects the middle ear with the 
 throit. 
 
 Ex-ha'lent. From the Latin ezhalare, 
 
 to throw out. 
 Ex-trem'i-ties. The limbs j as the 
 
 legs and arms. 
 
 Fas'ci-a. Latin. A thin membrane that 
 surrounds tlie mi.scies and tendons. 
 
 Fe'mur. Latin. The thigh-bone. 
 
 Fi'BaE. An organic filament, or thread, 
 of a solid consistence, which entpra 
 into the composition of every animal 
 and vegetable lexture. 
 
 FiB'u-i.A. Latin. A clasp. The outei 
 
 and lefiser bone of the leg. 
 Fil'a-MENT. ■■■jm the Latin Jilum, a 
 
 thread. A small fibre. 
 Fol'li-cle. From the Latin foUts, a 
 
 bag. Very minute secreting cavities. 
 
 Fore-arm. That part of the arm be 
 
 tween the elbow and wrist. 
 FUNC'TION. From the Latin fiingor, I 
 
 net, 1 perform. The action of organs , 
 
 as the function or action c*^ ike eye is to 
 
 see, the ear to h^ar. 
 Gan'gli-ON. From the Greek gaggUcn^ 
 
 a knot. An enlargement upon a n«rr« 
 
 or tendon. 
 Gust'a-TO-RY. From the Latin gutlua 
 
 tne taste. Belonging to the sense of 
 
 taste. 
 GAs'T-iic JincE From the Qrrek. gas- 
 
 ter, the stomach. The fluiil secreted l.y 
 
 the stomach. 
 
178 
 
 3L0SSART. 
 
 Glot'tis a small, oblon? opening at 
 the upper i)art of tlio larynx. 
 
 OLANua. From the Latin glans, a nut. 
 Soft, tieiiliy organs, of various sizes. 
 
 Heart. A muscular organ, situated in 
 the left side of the chest. 
 
 IIu'MER-U8. The bone of the arm, sit- 
 uated between the shoulder-joint and 
 elbow. 
 
 ilu'MOR. Every fluid substance of an 
 organi/.ed body ; as the chyle, the Mood. 
 
 !lY'URO-aEN. From the Greek hydro, 
 water, and geinomai, I engender A 
 gas which constitutes one of the ele- 
 ments of water. 
 
 Hy-oi-ene'. The science of preserving 
 the health. 
 
 fN-ci'soR. From the Latin tnctdo, I cut. 
 The fore-teeth. 
 
 IN-T£S'TINE. Latin. The alimentary 
 canal. 
 
 I'Ris. Latin. The rainbow. The col- 
 ored membrane around the pupil of 
 the eye. 
 
 Lab'Y-rinth. From the Greek laburin- 
 thos, a place full of turnings. A name 
 given to the windings of the internal 
 ear. 
 
 Lacii'ry-mal. From the Latin lachry- 
 ma, a tear. 
 
 Lac'T£-al. .-cm the Latin lae, milk. 
 The vessels that convey the chyle, or a 
 niilk-liko _ianre, into the eins. 
 
 •jAR'ynx From ti;e Grefk laruj^, a 
 whistle. The upper puii of the vvind- 
 
 Liq'a-ment. From ligo, I bind. A 
 strong, flbrous substance, which binds 
 bones, &c., together. 
 
 Liv'er. a large gland situated below 
 the right lung. 
 
 Lym-phat'ics. Vessels that perform 
 the office of absorption. 
 
 IIe-oul'la. From the Latin medulla, 
 marrow 
 
 Me-dul'la On-LO!« oa'ta. The t\A- 
 nal cord that ia situated within the 
 Bkull-bonca. 
 
 Mem'brane. From the Latin memhra- 
 iia, a film, a delicate w^.b. A nams 
 given to different thin orgai^s. 
 
 Mes'en-ter-y. From the Greek metoa, 
 in the middle, and entcron, an intestine. 
 A membrane in the middle of the lutes' 
 tines, by which they are attached tu the 
 spinal column. 
 
 Met-a-car'pus. From the Greek mcta, 
 after, and karpos, the wrist. That part 
 of the hand between the wrist and fin- 
 gers. 
 
 Met-a-tar'sus. From tne Greek meta, 
 after, and tarsos, the instepi. That part 
 of the foot between the instep and toes 
 
 Mid'riff. The diaphragm. 
 
 Mi'TRAL. Resembling a mtire, or bishop's 
 
 bonnet. The name of two vaires of 
 
 the heart. 
 
 Mo'lar. From the [>atin molo, I grind 
 The name of certain '.eeth. 
 
 Mu'cus. A viscid fluid secreted by the 
 mucous membrane, which it serves to 
 moisten, and also to defend. 
 
 Mus'cLE. A bundle of fibres enclosed in 
 a sheath. 
 
 Nerve. An organ of sensation and 
 motion in animals. 
 
 Nl'TRO-GEN. From the Greek nitron 
 nitre, and gennad, I beget. One of the 
 gases that compp.se i;tmospheric air. 
 
 Nu-TRi'TiON. The act or process of pro 
 nuitiiig the growth, or repairing the 
 waste of the system. 
 
 CE-sopii'a-gus. From the Greek oii, 
 I cirry, and phagd, I eat. The tube 
 that leads from the mouth to the 
 stomach. 
 
 Ol-fA'jt'o-rt. From the Latin oI/m- 
 tus. IluUmging to the sense of smell. 
 
 O-men'tum Latin. The caul, so called 
 because iHe ancient priests prophesied 
 from on inspection of this membiane. 
 
 I 
 
OLOSSARY. 
 
 179 
 
 Ob'OAX. Prom the Greek orgunon, an 
 Instrument. A part of the system des- 
 tined to exerciae some particular func- 
 tion. 
 
 Ox'Y-OEN. From the Greek oxua, acid, 
 and geinomai, I engender. A gaa which 
 constitutes about one fiAh of our atmos- 
 phere. 
 
 Pan'cre-as. From the Greek pan, all, 
 and krea3, flesh ; that is, quite fleshy, 
 A g'.and situated behind the stomach. 
 
 Pa-PIL'la. From the Latin papilla, nip- 
 ple. Small, conirwil prominences seeii 
 ' on the tongue and skin. 
 
 Pa-ROT'id. From the Greek para, about, 
 and ova, the ear. A gland situated un- 
 der the ear. 
 
 Pa-tel'la. From the Latin patina, a 
 dish. The knee-pan. 
 
 Pel'vis. L3»tin. A basin. The name 
 of a bony structure at the lower part 
 of the trunk. 
 
 Per-i-os'te-um. From p»n, about, and 
 OS, bone. The membrane, or skin that 
 surrounds the bones. 
 
 Per-spi-ra'tion. The evacuation of 
 the dtiids of the body through the pores 
 of the skin. 
 
 Pha-lan'oes. From the Greek pha- 
 lagx, a tile of soldiers. The bones 
 composing the fingers and toea. 
 
 Phar'ynx. From the Hreek pharugx, 
 the pharynx. The swallow. 
 
 PllYS-l-OL'O-GY. From the Greek phu- 
 »j?, nature, and logos, a discourse. The 
 science which trcat^s of the functions 
 of animals and vegetables. 
 
 Pleu'ra. Greek. The menibrnne that 
 lines the chest and surrounds the lungs. 
 
 PUL'MO-NA-RY. Belonging to the lungs. 
 
 Pi.EX'us. Latin. Any union of nerves 
 or fibres, in the Toruj of net-work. 
 
 ELa'di-us. Latin. A spoke. The small 
 bone of the fore-arm. 
 
 Bec'tuh. The lower and straight por- 
 tion ol the intestines 
 
 Re-siu'u-XJM. Residue. The waste re- 
 mains of the food. 
 
 Ret'i-na. From the Latin reU, a uet 
 The net-like expansion of the optic 
 nerve on the inner surface of the 
 eye. 
 
 Sa'crum. A bone so called because U 
 was ofl'ered in sacrifice. The lower 
 portion of the spinal column. 
 
 Sa-li'va. Latin. The fluid secreted in 
 the mouth. 
 
 ScAP'u-LA. Latin. The shoulder-blade 
 
 ScLE-ROT'lc. From the Greek skleroo, 
 I harden. A membrane of the eye 
 
 SE-CRE'TlOJf. From the Latin secemere, 
 to separate. The function of several 
 glands, by which they separate from 
 the blood the material which they ra> 
 spcctively demand for their several pur 
 poses. 
 
 Sem-i-lu'nar. From the Latin #«m», 
 half, and luna, moon. The name of 
 two valves at the commencement of 
 the aorta and pulmonary artery. 
 
 8kel'e-ton. From the Greek skellO, 
 I dry. The articulated, dry bones of 
 an animal. 
 
 Spi'nal. Cord. A prolongation of the 
 brain. 
 
 Spine. From the Latin spina, a thorn. 
 Tlie back-bone. 
 
 Spleen. The milt. It was supposed 
 by the ancients to be the seat of nicl 
 anclioly, anger, and vexation. 
 
 Ster'num. Greek. The breast-bone. 
 
 Stom'ach. The principal organ of di 
 gestion, situated below the left lung. 
 
 Sub-lin'gual. From the Latin stib, 
 under, and lingua, the tongue. The 
 name applied to the gland under the 
 tongue. 
 
 Sub-max'il-la-ry. From the Latin 
 snb, under, and maxilla, the jaw-bone. 
 The name applied to the gland under 
 the Jaw. 
 
 SuT'uRE. From the Latin tM», I •titcta 
 
 I 
 
180 
 
 GL0S9ARY. 
 
 Th« senm or joint whicli unites tlie 
 ikull-bones. 
 
 flVN-O'vi-A. From the Greeic sun, with 
 and oon, an egg. The lubricating tluit. 
 of the Joints. 
 
 Bts'tem. From the Greeli »un, to- 
 gether, and isteini, I place. An assem- 
 blage of organs, arranged according to 
 some plan or meliiod ; as the nervous 
 system. 
 
 Bys-tem'ic. Belonging to the general 
 system. 
 
 Ten'don. From the Greek teind, 1 
 stretch. Strong, white cords, that con- 
 ned the muscles to the bone which 
 they move. 
 
 TiiO-RAC'ic. From the Greek IhOrax, 
 the chest. 
 
 Tib'i-a. Latin. A pipe or flute. The 
 largest bone of the leg. 
 
 Tra'cue-a. From the Greek traehtu, 
 rough, and arteria. The canal that 
 conveys air to the lungs. 
 
 Tri-cus'fid. From the Latin trea, three, 
 and cuspis, a point 1'he th -ee valves 
 lu the right side o! the beoit. 
 
 Trunk. The body of animals, without 
 the limbs. 
 
 I<atin. Tlie drum of the 
 
 A cubit. A bone of 
 
 Tym'pan-um. 
 
 ear. 
 Ul'na. Latin. 
 
 the fore-arm. 
 
 Valve. From the Latin vaha, a 
 small door. Any membrane, or dou- 
 bling of any membrane, which pre- 
 vents fluid from flowing back in <* ^ 
 vessels and canals of the animal body 
 
 Veins. From the Latin vena. The 
 vessels that carry the blood to the 
 heart. 
 
 Ven'tri-cle. Latin. A small cavity 
 of the animal body. 
 
 Vert'e-bra,-jE. From the Latin »«■ 
 to, I turn. A Joint of the spinal 
 column. 
 
 Ves'i-cle. From the Latin vuicula, t 
 small vessel, or bladder. 
 
 Vi'tal. From the Latin vita, life. 
 
 ViT'RE-ous. PerUining to giaxs. A 
 name given tr one of the humnra of 
 tiie oye 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Absorption, 76 
 
 Aci D8, Antiduted for, 172 
 
 AlB, Compoaition of the, 96 
 
 »— , the Effects of, when Impure, 99 
 
 — , the Elfecta of, upon the Bkin,...125 
 
 Air-Ce LL3, 90 
 
 Ammonia, Antidotes for 170 
 
 Aorta, t)5 
 
 Arsenic, Antidote for, 171 
 
 Arteries, 63 
 
 , Nutrient, 87 
 
 , Pulmonary, S4 
 
 of the Skin, 117 
 
 , Treatment of divided, . . . .72 
 
 ASPVYXIA, from Carbonic Gas, 105 
 
 , from Electricity, 105 
 
 , from Drowning, 104 
 
 , from Hanging, 104 
 
 Attitudes, 25 
 
 AuaiCLEsof the Heart, 62 
 
 B. 
 
 Batiiino, Necessity of, 125 
 
 , Method of, 164 
 
 Belladonna, Antidote for, 175 
 
 Bile, 52 
 
 Blood, Composition of, 86 
 
 , Circulation of, 67 
 
 , Change of, 97 
 
 BOPfES, Structure of, 11 
 
 , Physi.ilogy of, 21 
 
 , Hygiene of, 24, 26 
 
 of the Head, 11 
 
 of the Trunk, 12 
 
 of the Upper Extremities, 16 
 
 of the Lower Extremities, 17 
 
 BiiAiN, 127 
 
 , Membranes of, 198 
 
 , Functions of, 134 
 
 , Injuries of, 137 
 
 H.IO.NflllA 90 
 
 liRONC HITIS, 90, Hi 
 
 Burns and Scalds, Treatment of,. .126 
 
 f. 
 
 Capillaries, 6fi 
 
 Carbonic Gas, 95, 1U7 
 
 the Effect* ui, when 
 
 breathed 99 
 
 Cartilage, 19 
 
 Cerebellum, 128 
 
 Cerebrum, 128 
 
 Chest, 13, 101 
 
 wUYLE -....54 
 
 16 
 
 rA4ia, 
 Chtmk, »i 
 
 Circulatort Oroans, C9 
 
 , Physiology of, 67 
 
 , Hygiene of, ....70 — 75 
 
 Clothing, Amount of, 123 
 
 , Change of, !i24 
 
 , Kind of, 122 
 
 should be loosely worn, 
 
 24, 70, 123 
 
 CONIUM, Antidote for, 174 
 
 Copper, Antidote for, 171 
 
 Cuticle, 115, 1I9 
 
 Cutis Vera, ... 117 
 
 D. 
 
 Diaphragm, 31 
 
 Digestive Organs, 48 
 
 , Physiology ofj. .53 
 
 , Hygiene of, 5o — 61 
 
 Drinks, 59 
 
 Drowned, Treatment of Persons,. .104 
 Duodenum, 50 
 
 E. 
 
 Ear, Anatomy of, 152 
 
 , Pliy siology of, 155 
 
 , Hygiene of, ; 157 
 
 EXHA LENTS, 82 
 
 Eve, Anatomy of, 143 
 
 , PhyHiology of, 149 
 
 , Hygiene of, 150 
 
 — ^-, Method of removing Dust from, 151 
 
 P. 
 
 Fascia, 29 
 
 Fibres, 27 
 
 Follicle, «a 
 
 Food, ('hanges of, during the Diges- 
 tive Proctjss, 54 
 
 , Uuaiititv of, 56 
 
 , Ciuality'of, 57 
 
 , Mfmner of taking, .SS 
 
 , Time for taking, 60 
 
 Frozen Limbs, Treatment of, IHB 
 
 G. 
 
 Gastric Juice 54 
 
 GLANiis, Structure of, 83 
 
 , Larhrymal, H7 
 
 , Ijympliatic, 'lii 
 
 , Mesenteric, 51 
 
 , O.I, 118, ICO 
 
 , Perspiratory, ] 18, 120 
 
 , ? Ji -ary, 48 
 
 Glottis, IM 
 
182 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 II. rAOB. 
 
 Health, Means of preBerving, 158 
 
 [ICARiiNG, Sense of, 153 
 
 Heart, ti2 
 
 , Contractions of the 07, fJ9 
 
 Heat, Animal, 106 
 
 , Hygiene of 108, lo9 
 
 Hemokruaqe, Means of arresting,... 72 
 
 I. 
 
 Intestines, 50 
 
 J. 
 
 iriNTS, Structure of, 19 
 
 , Use of, 21 
 
 I.. 
 
 LaCTE ALS, 51 
 
 Larynx 110 
 
 I^e: AU, Antidote K>r, 171 
 
 Lioaments, 20 
 
 l-iuirr, Influence of, 37, 12G 
 
 LiviiR, 52 
 
 LUNU3, 89 
 
 Lymphatics, 76 
 
 , Physiolojjy of, 78 
 
 , Hygiene of, 79 — 81 
 
 , of the Skin, 117 
 
 M. 
 
 Medulla Oblongata, 129 
 
 Membrane, 21 
 
 Mercury, Antidote for, 17.3 
 
 Mineral Poisons, 170 
 
 Muscles, Anatomy of, 27 
 
 , Physiology of, 30 
 
 , Hygiene of, 3f)— 42 
 
 -, Compression of, 38, 113 
 
 N. 
 
 Nervous System, 127 
 
 , Physiology of, ..131 
 
 , Hygiene of.im — 137 
 
 Nerves, 130 
 
 , Sympathetic, J.30 
 
 . , of the Skm, 117, 119 
 
 , Gustatory, 139 
 
 , Olfactory, 141 
 
 , Auditory, = 1.54 
 
 , Optic, 146 
 
 NiTR"., Treatment for an Over-dose. . 172 
 N u RSES, Directions for, 1G4 
 
 O. 
 
 O^sopiiAsus, 49 
 
 Omentum, 52 
 
 Opium, Treatment for an Over-dose,. . 173 
 
 P. 
 
 Pancreas, 52 
 
 Periosteum, 21 
 
 PHARYNX, 'i'i 
 
 fi I ISON B anu their Ar.tid )tes 170 
 
 R. AOB 
 
 Reading, the proper Postton tn,....119 
 
 Removal of Disease, 15& 
 
 RESPI RATOKY ORO AN.-f, 8S 
 
 , Physiology of, 193 
 
 -, Hygiene of, 98—10;; 
 
 Retina 44 
 
 Ribs »a 
 
 S. 
 
 Saliva, 53 
 
 Secretory Organs, 82 
 
 -, Physiology of, 83 
 
 ■, Hygiene of, 84, W 
 
 Senses, 138 
 
 Skin, Anatomy of, 115 
 
 , Physiology of, II!) 
 
 , Hygiene of, 122, liti 
 
 Smell, Sense of, 141 
 
 Sound, ill, 155 
 
 Spinal Column 14 
 
 , Curvature of, 20 
 
 Cord, 129 
 
 Spleen, 62 
 
 Stramonium, Treatment for an 
 
 Over-dose, 174 
 
 Stomach 49 
 
 Synovia, 21 
 
 Synovial Membrane, « • .20 
 
 T. 
 
 Taste, Sense of, 139 
 
 Teeth, Anatomy of, 43 
 
 , Physiology of, 44 
 
 , Hygiene of, 45, 4b 
 
 Tendon > 27 
 
 Thoracic Duct, 52 
 
 Throat, extraneous Bo<lic8 in, 114 
 
 Touch, Sense of, 138 
 
 Trachea, ... 'JO 
 
 U. 
 
 Ulna, ; 16 
 
 V. 
 
 Valves of the Heart, 02 
 
 of tlie Aorta, t)3 
 
 of the Pulmonary Artery, (13 
 
 Veins (iC 
 
 of the Skin, 117 
 
 Vegetable Poisons, 173 
 
 Ventilation 100 
 
 Ventricles of the Heart, 62 
 
 Vertebra, 14 
 
 Vision, 143 
 
 Vocal Organs, lio 
 
 , Physiology of, Ill 
 
 , Hygiene of,. ..112, 114 
 
 W. 
 
 WATCHTiRS, Directions for, 188 
 
 WOUH' s, Treatment of, 7<t 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
KEY TO ANATOMICAL OUTLINE PLATES. 183 
 
 KEY TO ANATOMICAL OUTLINE PLATES. 
 
 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 
 
 In using these plates, we would suggest, that the pupil carefully exaimne 
 the illustrating cuts interspersed with the text, in connection with the 
 fesson to be recited. The similarity between these and the plates will 
 enable the pupil to recite, and the teacher to conduct his recitation, from 
 the latter. 
 
 Let a pupil show the situation of an organ, or part, on an anatomical 
 outline plate, and also give its structure ; while other members of the class 
 note all omissions and misstatements. Another pupil may give the use of 
 that organ, and if necessary, others may give an extended explanation. 
 The third may explain the laws on which the health of the part depends, 
 while other members of the class supply what has been omitted. After 
 thus presenting the subject in the form of topics, questions Tiay be pro- 
 posed prciuiscuously, (roir each para^'aph, and where examples occur in 
 the text, let other analogous ones be given. 
 
 If the physiology and hygiene of a given subject have not been studied, 
 confine the recitation to those parts only on which the pupil is prepared. 
 When practicable, the three departments should be united ; but this can 
 only be done when the chapter on the hygiene has been learned, while 
 the physiology can be united with the anatomy, in all chapters upon 
 lihy biology. 
 
 PixA.TE I. 
 
 A FRONT VIEW OF THE SKELETON, 
 
 Bones of the Head. 7, The sphenoid bone. 8, The frontal bone. 10, The 
 parietal bone. 11, The os unguis. 12, The superior maxillary bono, 
 (tipper jaw.) 13, The nasal bone. 14, The ethmoid bone. IS, The malar 
 bone, (cheek-bone.) 16, The vomer. 17, The inferior maxillary bone, 
 (the lower jaw.) a. Its body, b, Its ramus, or branch. 18, The teeth 
 
 Bonesof ike Trunk. 1, 1, The spinal column. 2, The sternum. «i, 3, The 
 ribs. 4, The sacrum. 6, The innominatum. 
 
 Bovica of the Upper Extremities. 19, The clavicle, (coUw bone ) 20, Tho 
 
184 KEY TC AN/^TOMICAL OUTLINE PLATES. 
 
 ■capula, (shonldpr-blnde.) 21, The humrrus. 22, The iilna. 23, Th« 
 radius. 24, 2.>, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, The bones of the carpus, (wrist.j 
 y2, 32, 32, The five bones of the metacarpus, (the pahn of tht hand.' 
 33, 33, 33, The first range of finger-bones. 34, 34, The second range of 
 finger-bones. 3o, 3.5, 3.), The third range of finger-bones. 
 
 Bones of the Lower Extremities. 3G, The feraur, (thigh-bone.) 37, Tht 
 patella, (knee-pan.) 38, The tibia, (shin-bone.) 39, The fibula. 40, 40, 
 40, The bones of the tarsus, (instep.) 41,41, The bones of the metatarsus 
 (middle of the foot.) 42, 42, The bones of the toes. 
 
 Articulations. (Left side of the plate.) 
 
 Ligaments of Uie Trunk, 1, 1, The common spinal ligament. 2, 2, The 
 intervertebral ligament, (cartilage bctvyeen the vertebraj.) 9, 10, 11, 12, Ar- 
 ticulations of the ribs with the spinal column. 13, 13, 14, 16, 16, Liga- 
 ments that connect the cartilages of the ribs with the sternum. 
 
 Ligaments of the Upper Extremities. 25, The ligament that connects 
 the clavicle and sternum. 27, The ligament that connects the upper rib 
 and clavicle. 28, 29, 30, Ligaments that connect the clavicle and scapula 
 81, 32, 33, 34, Ligaments of the shoulder-joint. 35, 35, 36, Ligaments of 
 the elbow-joint. 37, 38, 39, 40, Ligaments of the wrist. 41, 42, 43, 44, 
 Ligaments of the fingers. 
 
 Ligaments of the Lower Extremities. 49, 49, Ligaments of the hip-joint. 
 60, 50, Ligaments of the patella. 61, 52, 63, 64, 55, Ligaments of the 
 knee-joint. 66, A large bursa mucosa. 67, The ligament of the tibia and 
 fibula. 58, 58, The interosseous ligament. 69, 69, Ligaments of the an- 
 kle-joint. 60, 61, 62, Ligaments of the metatarsus. 63, 64, Ligaments of 
 the toes. 
 
 A, The brachial artery. B, The brachial vein. C, The radial artery. 
 D, The femoral artery. E, The femoral vein. F, O, The anterior tibial 
 artery. 
 
 PLATE II. 
 
 A BACK VIEW OF THE SKELETON. 
 
 Bone* of the Uead. 5, The occipital bone. 6, The parietal bone. 7, The 
 temporal bone. 8, The frontal bone. 9, The sphenoid bone. 15, The 
 malar bone. 16, The nasal bone. 17, The superior maxillary bone, (upper 
 jaw.) 18, The inferior maxillary bone, (lower jaw.) 19, The teeth. 
 
 Bmies of the Tnmk. 1,1, The spinal column. 2, The sacrrm. 3, The 
 coccyx. 20, The innominatam. 4, 4, The ribs. 
 
 B(mes of the Ujyper Extremities. 21, Theclavicb, (Cv.'llar-bone.) 22, The 
 scapula, (sh"ulder-bladc.) 23, The humerus. 24. The ulna. 25, The 
 radius. 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32. The bones of the cs'pi's. (wrist.) 
 33, 33, 33, The bones of the metacarpus, (palm of the h<uid.) 34 3^, 34, 
 Tlie firpt range of finger-bones. 35, 35, The secona range uf finj-o'-hoiwa 
 30, 36, 36, The third range of flnger-tx'uss. 
 
KEY TO ANATOMICAL OUTLINE PLATES. 185 
 
 Boties of the Lower Extremities. 37, The fcnmr, (thigh-bone.) 38, The 
 patella, (knee-pan.) 39, The tibia, (shin-bone.) 40, The fibu'a. 41, 42, 
 13, 44, 45, The bones of the tarsus, (instep.) 46, 46, The bonca of the 
 metatarsus, (middle of the foot.) 47, 47, Bones of the toes. 
 
 Articulations. (Left side of the plate.) 
 
 Ligaments of tlie Trunk. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, Ligaments of the 
 spinal column. 14, 14, 15, 15, Ligaments that connect th. 'bs and spinal 
 column. 11, 11, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, Ligaments that connect the sacrum 
 and innominatum. 
 
 LiffuTtietUs of the Upper Extremities. 27, 28, Ligaments that connect the 
 clavicle and scapula. 29, The capsular ligament of the shoulder-joint. 
 80, 30, Lig'aments of the elbow. 31, 32, 33, 34, Ligaments of the carpus, 
 (wrist.) 
 
 Ligaments of the Lower Extremities. 9, Tendon of the gluteus muscle. 
 35, The capsular ligament of the hip-joint. 36, 36, Ligaments of the knee* 
 joint. 37, The ligament that connects the tibia and fibula. 38, The in. 
 terosseous ligament. 39, 40, Ligaments of the ankle-joint. 
 
 PLATE m. 
 
 A FRONT VIEW OF THE MUSCLES. 
 
 Mitscles of the Head and Neck. 7, The sterno-mastoideus muscle. 
 8, The stemo-hyoideus muscle. 9, The omo-hyoideus muscle. 10, The 
 trapezius muscle. 11, The orbicularis oculi muscle. 12, The frontal 
 muscle. 14, The orbiculans oris muscle. 15, The elevator muscle of the 
 nostrils. 16, The zygomatic muscle. 17, The depressor of the lower lip. 
 18, The depressor anguli oris muscle. 19, The triangular muscle of the 
 nose. 20, 21, The aural muscles. 22, The masseter muscle. 
 
 Muscles of the Tnmk. 2, 3, The external oblique muscles 
 
 Micscles of the Upper Extremities. 1, The grand pectoral muscle. 
 3, 4, The serratus muscle. 23, The deltoid muscle. 24, The biceps 
 brachialis muscle. 2.5, The coraco-brachialis muscle. 26, The anterior 
 brachial muscle. 27, The triceps brachialis muscle. 28, The long su- 
 pinator muscle. 29, The external radial muscle. 30, The pronator teres 
 muscle. 31, The anterior radial muscle. 32, The palmaris brevis muscle 
 33, The anterior ulnar muscle. 35, The palmar muscle 36, The abductor 
 muscle of tlie thumb. 37, The adductor muscle of the thumb. 38, 39, 
 Small flexor muscles of the thumb. 40, The abductor muscle of the little 
 finger. 41, 41, The lumbricalcs muscles. 61,61, The bifurcation of the 
 tendons of the superficial flexor muscle, in the fingers. 
 
 Muscles of the Loioer Extremtties. 42, The fascia lata muscle. 43, The 
 sartorius muscle. 44, The rectus fcmoris muscle. 45, The vastus sxtemus 
 muscle. 46, The vastus intcrnus muscle. 47, The internal straight muscle. 
 48, The pectineus muscle. 49, The adductor muscle. 50, Ihe psoai* 
 
 J6» 
 
1H6 KEY TO ANATOMICAL OUTLlNli PLATES. 
 
 muscle. 61, The tibialis anticus muscle. 52, Tho long extensor muscle 
 of the great toe. 63, The long extensor muscle of the toes. 64, Th« 
 anterior peroneal muscle. 65, The long lateral peroneal muscle. 66, 57, The 
 gastrocncnui muscles. 58, The long flexor muscle of the great to& 
 59, The short extensor muscles of the toes. 60, The abduc tor muscle of 
 the great toe. 
 
 The figures and letters on the left side of the plate, indicate the position 
 of important fasciffi, that cover the muscles and enclose the tcndoni. 
 
 PLAl'E IV. 
 
 A BACK VIEW OF THE MUSCLES. 
 
 Muschs of the Head and Neck. 4, The sterno-mastoideus muscle. 
 5, The complexus muscle. 6, The mylo-hyoideus muscle. 7, 8, The oo- 
 cjpito-frontalis muscle. 9, The massetcr muscle. 10,11,12, The anterior, 
 middle, and posterior aural muscles. 13, The temporal muscle. 
 
 Muscles of the Trunk. 1,1, The trapezius muscle. 2, The latissimus dorsl 
 muscle. 3, The rhomboideus muscle. 4, The external oblique muscle. 
 
 Muscles of t/ie Upper Extremities. 5, The deltoid nmscle. 6, 7, The 
 infra-spinatus muscle. 9, The triceps extensor muscle. 10, The internal 
 brachial muscle. 11, The long supinator muscle. 12, The external radi- 
 al muscle. 13, The second external radial muscle. 14, The anconeus 
 muscle. 15, 16, The extensor digitorum communis muscle. 17, The ex- 
 tensor carpi ulnaris muscle. 18, The flexor carpi ulnaris. 19, 20, The 
 pxtensor ossis mctacarpi poUicis muscles. 21, An extensor muscle of the 
 thumb. 22, 'ii, Interossii muscles. 
 
 Mtunles of the Lower Extremities. 29, The gluteus maximus muscle. 
 30, The gluteus mcdius muscle. 31, The biceps flexor cruris muscle 
 82, The semi-tendinosus muscle. 33, The semi-raembranosis muscle. 
 'W, The gracilis muscle. 35, The adductor muscle. 36, The vastus ex- 
 ternus muscle. 37, The sartorius muscle. 38, 39, The gastrocnemii 
 muscles. 40, The long peroneal muscle. 41, The external peroneal mus- 
 cle. 42, Tho long flexor muscle of the great toe. 43, The long extensor 
 muscle of the toes. 44, The short extensor muscle of the toes. 47, The 
 short flexor muscle of the toes. 
 
 The figures and letters on the left side of the plate, indicate the position 
 of membranous fasciae which envelop the muscles and tendons. 
 
 PLATE V. 
 
 ORGANS OF THE THORAX AND ABDOMEN 
 
 Fig. 1. The Mouth and Neck. (A Side view.) 1, The upper lip. 2, Tho 
 lower lip. 3, The i-pper jaw. 4, The lower jaw. 5, The tongue. 6, The 
 hard palate, (roof of the mDuth.) 7. The parotid gland. 8, The sub- 
 
KEY TO ANATOMICAL OUTLINE I'LATES. Ifi'I 
 
 lingual gland. T, The larynx. 10, Thn pharynx. 11, The ocBophagua 
 
 12, The Jipper portion of the spinal column. C, The spinal cord. 
 
 The (Sliest and its Oryans. 9, 9, The trachea. R, The right auncle 
 of the heart. L, The left auricle. 13, The left ventricle of the neart. 
 14, The right ventricle, lo. The aorta. 16, The pulmonary artery. 
 17, The vena cava desccndens. 18, The right subclavian vein. 19, The 
 left subcHvian vein. 20, The right jugular vein. 21, The left jugular 
 vein. 22, The right carotid artery. 23, The left carotid artery. 24, 25, 
 26, The upper, middle, and lo^-er lobes of the right lung. 21, 28, The 
 upper and lower lobes of the left lung. 29, 29, 29, The diaphragm. 
 P, V, P, P, The pleura, that lines the cavity of the chest S, 8, The clavi- 
 cles. O, O, 0, O, The riba. M, M, M, M, Muscles of the chest. 40, The 
 thoracic duct, opening into the left subclavian vein. 
 
 I'he Abdomen and its Organs. 30, The stomach. 31, 32, The right and 
 left lobe of the liver. F, The fissure that separates the two lobes. 33, The 
 gall bladder, 34, 34, The duodenum. 3-5, The ascending colon. 36, The 
 transverse colon. 37, The descending colon. 38, 38, 38, 38, The small 
 intestine. 39, 39, The walls of the abdominal cavity turned down. 41, 
 The spleen. 
 
 Fig. 2. The Relation of the Lacteals and Thoracic Duct. 1, 1, A section 
 of the small intestine. 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, Mesenteric glands, through 
 whicn the lacteals from the intestine pass. 3, Several lacteal vesseU 
 entering the enlarged portion and commencement of the thoracic duct. 
 6, 5, 5, The thoracic duct. 6, The thoracic duct opening into the left sub- / 
 clavian vein. 7, (See 40, Fig. 1.) 8, The right subclavian vein. 9, The 
 vena cava dcscendens. 10, 11, 11, The aorta. 12, The carotid arteries. 
 
 13, 13, The jugular veins. 14, The vena azagos. 15, 15, The spinal col- 
 umn. 16, The diaphragm. 
 
 Fig. 3. The Relation of the Larynx, Trachea, Bronchia, and Air-celU 
 1, 1, 1, An outline of the right lung. 2, 2,2, An outline of the left lung. 
 3, The larynx. 4, The trachea. 5, The right bronchia. 6, The left bron 
 chia. 7, 7, 7, 7, Divisions of the right bronchia. 8, 8, 8, 8, Divisions of the 
 left bronchia. 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, 9, Air-cells. 
 
 Fig. 4. An idial View of a lateral and vertical Section of the Larynx. 
 1, 1, The superior vocal cords, (ligaments.) 2, 2, The inferior vocal cords. 
 3, 3, The glottis. 4, 4, The ventricles of the larynx 
 
 PLATE VI. 
 
 HEART, ARTERIES, AND VEINS. 
 
 Fig. 1. The Heart and large Arteries. 1, The right auricle of the heart 
 2, The right ventricle of the heart. 3, The left auricle. 4, Tfic left ven- 
 tricle. 6, The pulmonar/ artery. 6, The aorta. 7, 7, The descending 
 aorta. 8, Ttie arteria innominata, 9, The left carotid artery. 10. The left 
 subclavian artery. 66, The right subclavian artery. 
 
 / 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 «// 
 
 
 ^4^ 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 Hi 1 2.8 
 
 ■ 50 "^" 
 
 
 Z2 
 
 lig III 2.0 
 
 1.4 
 
 1.8 
 
 1.6 
 
 j^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 <# 
 
 '" 
 
 /i 
 
 ^a 
 
 '^ 
 
 r 
 
 'c*l 
 
 
 
 
 '/ 
 
 s>.. 
 
 s 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Cor^ oration 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 1716) 872-4503 
 
L 
 
188 KEY TO ANATOMICAL OUTLINE PLATES. 
 
 Arteries of the Ntck and Head. 15, The right carotid artery. 18, The 
 left carotid artery. 17, The right temporal artery. 60, The right facial 
 artery. 64, The left temporal artery. 
 
 Arteries of ,e Ujjper Extremities. 11, 11, The left brachial artery, 
 12, The left radial artery. 13, 13, The right brachial artery. 14, The 
 right radial artery. 61, The right ulnar artery. 
 
 Arteries of the Lower Extremities. 18, The left iliac artery. 19, The right 
 iliac artery. 20, The left femoral artery. 21, The right femoral artery. 
 22, The peroneal artery. 23, The left anterior tibial artery. 24, The mus- 
 cular artery. 2-5, 25, The right and left arteria profunda. 26, The right 
 anterior tibial artery. 27, The right peroneal artery. 
 
 T/ie Veins of t/ie Neck atid Head. 28, The vena cava descendens. 
 29, The left subclavian vein. 30, The right subclavian vein. 31, The 
 right jugular vein. 32, The left jugular vein. 63, The right temporal 
 Tein. 65, The left temporal vein. 49, The right facial vein. 
 
 Veins of the Upper Extremities. 33, The left brachial vein. 34, The left 
 radial vein. 35, The right brachial vein. 36, The right radial vein. 
 61, The right ulnar vein. 
 
 Veins of the Lywer Extremities. 27, The vena cava ascendens. 38, The 
 left iliac vein. !9, The right iliac vein. 40, The left femoral vein. 41, The 
 right femoral vein. 42, The left anterior tibial vein. 43, The left per- 
 oneal vein. 44; The right anterior tibial vein. 45, The right peroneal 
 vein. 46, 46, The profunda veins. 47, The muscular veins. 48, 48, 48, 
 48, 48, 48, Intercostal arteries and veins. 
 
 Fig. 2. The Relation of the Cavities of the Heart to the large Blood-vessels 
 1, The vena cava descendens. 2, The vena cava ascendcns. 3, The right 
 auricle of the heart. 4, The opening between the right auricle and right 
 ventricle. 5, The right ventricle. 6, The tricuspid valves. 7, The pul- 
 monary artery. 8, 8, The branches of the pulmonary artery that pass to 
 the right and left lung. 9, The semilunar valves of the pulmonary artery. 
 10, The left pulmonary veins. 11, The right pulmonary veins. 12, The 
 left auricle. 13, The opening between the left auricle and left ventricle. 
 14, The left ventricle. 15, The mitral valves. 16, 16, The aorta. 17, The 
 semilunar valves of the aorta. 18, The septum between the right and left 
 ventricle. 
 
 Fig. 3. An ideal View of the Heart, Atieries, and Veins. A, The right 
 auricle. B, The right ventricle. C, The tricuspid vaives. D, The open- 
 ing between the right auricle and right ventricle. E, The left auricle. 
 F, The left ventricle. G, The mitral valves. H, The opening between 
 the left auricle and left ventricle. I, T'le septum between the right and 
 left ventricle. K, The pulmonary artery. L, The set Jlunar valves of the 
 pulmonary artery. M, M, The right 'pulmonary artery. N, N, The left 
 pulmonary artery. O, O, 0, 0, O, O. The capillary vessels of the lungs. 
 P, P, P, The right pulmonary vein. Q, Q, The left pulmonavy vein 
 R, R, The aorta. S, The semilunar valves of the aorta. T, T, A branch 
 of the aorta to the upper extremities. U, U, U, U, A branch to the lower 
 ex-trtmities. V, V, V, V, V, V, The oapillary vessels at the extremity 
 
 
JfJi^ TO ANATOMICAi. OUTLINE PLATES. 189 
 
 of the branches of the aorta. W, W, The descending vena caya., 
 X, X, X, The ascending vena cava. 
 
 In Figf). 1, 2, 3, the course of the blood through the circulatory veMelg 
 is indicated by arrows. 
 
 PLATE Vn. 
 
 THE PULMONARY CIRCUi^ATION. 
 
 Fig. 1. 1, The right auricle oi heart. 2, The left auricle. 8, Tl.e 
 right ventricle of the heart. 4, The left ventricle. 5, The pulmonary 
 artery. 6, The branch of the pulmonary artery to the left lung. 7, The 
 branch of the pulmonary skftery to the right lung. 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 
 Branches of the pulmonary artery in the right and left lung. 9, 9, 9, 9, 9^ 9, 
 Air-cells. JO, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, Small pulmo:iary veins in the right 
 and left lung. 11, The left pulmonary vein. 12, 12, The right pulmonary 
 vein. 
 
 Fig. 2. An ideal View of the Pulmonary Circulation. 1,1, The right 
 lung. 2, 2, The left lung. 3, The trachea. 4, 4, J, 4, 4, The right bronchia. 
 5, 6, 6, 6, 6, The left ironchia. 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, 6, Air-cells, with arteries and 
 veins passing around them. 7, The right auricle of the heart. 8, The 
 right ventricle of the hearL 9, The tricuspid valves. 10, The pulmonary 
 artery. 11, 11, 11, 11, The right pulmonary artery. 12, 12, 12, 12, 12, The 
 left puln.onary artery. 13, 13, 13, 13, The right pulmonary vein. 
 
 14, 14, 14, 14, The left pulmonary vein. 16, The left auricle. 16, The 
 left ventricle. 17, The mitral valves. 18, The septum between the right 
 and left ventricles. 
 
 Fig. 3. An ideal View of the Cipillaries. 1, 1, A branch of the pul- 
 monary artery. 2, 2, A branch of the pulmonary vein. 3, 3, Capillar? 
 vessels between the artery and vein. 
 
 Fig. 4. An ideal View of the Relation of ttte Bronchia, Air-ceUt, Put- 
 hwnary Arteries, and Vein*. 1, A brou'^hial tube. 2, 2, 2, Air-cella. 
 3 A branch of the pulmonary artery. 4, A branch of the pulmonary vein. 
 
 PLATE Vin. 
 
 TUE CEREBRUM, CEREBELLUM, SPINAL CORD, AND 
 
 NERVES. 
 
 1, The cerebrum. 2 The cerebellum. 3, 3, The spinal cord. 4, The 
 orachial plexus of nerves, 5, The lumbar plexus of nerves. 6, The sa- 
 cral plexus of nerves. 7, The facial nerve. 8, 17, The radial nerve. 
 9, 9, 16, The ulnar nsrve. 10, The median nerve. Q, The circumjBev 
 nerve of the shoulder. 
 
 U, 11, The great sciatic nerve. 12, The external poplitea.^, or peroneal 
 
190 KEY TO ANATOMICAL OUTLINE PLATES. 
 
 nerve. 13, 13, The poster'or tibial nerve. 14, The external tibial nerve. 
 16, The muscular branch jf the external peroneal nerve. 18, The muBOO* 
 lar branch of the sciatic nerve. P, Q, The posterior tibial nerve. 
 
 The letters and other figures indicate minor nervous filaments dis- 
 tributed to the various muscles and the skin. 
 
 PLATE IX. 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 Fig. 1. A perspiratory Tribe and Gland. 1, 1, The contorted portion of 
 the tube that forms the gland. 2, 2, Two branches which unite to form 
 the main duct of the gland. 3, % The perspiratory tube. 4, The cuticle. 
 6, Its colored porHon. 6, The cutis vera, (true skin.) 7, 7, Fat vesicles, 
 m which the gland is imbedded. 
 
 Fig. 2. A Papilla of the Skin. 1, 1, Two papillae, formed of an artery, 
 vein, and nerve. 2, 2, 2, 2, Nerves forming a loop in the papillae. 3, 3, Ar- 
 teries of the papillBC. 4, 4, Veins of the papillae. 6, 6, A net-work of 
 arteries, veins, and nerves. 6, 6, Nerves of the skin. 8, 8, Arteries of 
 the skin. 7,7, Veins of the skin. 
 
 -Fig. 3. A Hair, and its Oil-Glands. 1, 1, The hair. 2, 2, The sheath 
 of the hair. 3, Oil-glands that surround the bulb of the hair, the ducts of 
 which open into the sheath of the hair, (2, 2.) 
 
 Fig. 4. A Section of the Skin. 1, 1, The cuticle. 2, 2, Its colored por- 
 tion. 3, 3, The papillary layer. 4, 4, A net-work of arteries, veins, and 
 nerves, upon the upper surface of the cutis vera. 6, 6, 6, 5, The cutis 
 vera, (true skin.) 6, 6, 6, Hairs that originate in the cutis vera. 7, 7, 7, Oil- 
 glands, the ducts of which connect with the sheath of the hair. 8, 8, 8 8, 
 8, 8, 8, 8, Perspiratory glands and their ducts. 9, 9; 9, 9, 9, Nerves of the 
 skin. 10, 10, 10, 10, 10, Arteries of the skin. 11, 11, 11, 11, 11, Veins of 
 the skin. 12, 12, 12, 12, Papillae, or ridges of the skin. 
 
 PLATE X. 
 
 AN ANTERO-POSTERIOR SECTION OF THE EYE. 
 
 Fig. 1. 1, 1, The sclerotic coat. 2, 2, The cornea. 3, 3, The choroid 
 coat. 4,4, The retina. 6,6, The iris. 6,6, The posterior cha 'ler of 
 the eye that contains the aqueous humor. 7, 7, The anterior c. nber. 
 8, 8, The pupil. 9, The crystalline humor. 10, 10, The vitreous humor. 
 11, The optic nerve. 12, A representation of a pen. 13, An ir. verted 
 image of the pen (12) on the retina. 14, 14, A canal surrounding th* 
 crystalline humor. 16, 1>';, The bevelled junction of the cornea and scla 
 
KEY TO ANATOMICAL OtTfLINE PLATES. 
 
 191 
 
 rotic coats. A. a perpendicular ray of light from the pen. B, B. obliqua 
 
 ternal ear. A Ihe meatus auditouus externus, (the tube that con«ecti 
 8, 8 The tympanum, (middle ear.) 4, The malleus. 5, The incus 
 Lib^wT^ '' i""'^'^^"' («tirrup-bone.) that conn'ects^ith the 
 
 u -TK ^. ' ' ^^^ semicircular canals. 13, 13, The cochlea 
 4, The auditory nerve. 15. The division of the auditory nerve to the 
 semicircular canals. 16. The division to the cochlea.^ l" I7 The 
 Bus ach.aa tube 18, The chorda tymr-ani nerve. 19, The seventL pa' 
 ac.l) nerve. 20 The styloid process of the te.p'oral Cl fl,'^, 
 21, 21, 21, The pntrous or hard portion of the ten.poral bone, in ^hki 
 the parts of the middle and internal ear are situated. .'"»'"»''»««»